WO2000000832A1 - Mobile base information detecting method and mobile base information multi-sensor and acceleration sensor - Google Patents
Mobile base information detecting method and mobile base information multi-sensor and acceleration sensor Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2000000832A1 WO2000000832A1 PCT/JP1999/003282 JP9903282W WO0000832A1 WO 2000000832 A1 WO2000000832 A1 WO 2000000832A1 JP 9903282 W JP9903282 W JP 9903282W WO 0000832 A1 WO0000832 A1 WO 0000832A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- sensor
- angular velocity
- weight
- capacitance
- acceleration
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01C—MEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
- G01C19/00—Gyroscopes; Turn-sensitive devices using vibrating masses; Turn-sensitive devices without moving masses; Measuring angular rate using gyroscopic effects
- G01C19/56—Turn-sensitive devices using vibrating masses, e.g. vibratory angular rate sensors based on Coriolis forces
- G01C19/5642—Turn-sensitive devices using vibrating masses, e.g. vibratory angular rate sensors based on Coriolis forces using vibrating bars or beams
- G01C19/5656—Turn-sensitive devices using vibrating masses, e.g. vibratory angular rate sensors based on Coriolis forces using vibrating bars or beams the devices involving a micromechanical structure
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01P—MEASURING LINEAR OR ANGULAR SPEED, ACCELERATION, DECELERATION, OR SHOCK; INDICATING PRESENCE, ABSENCE, OR DIRECTION, OF MOVEMENT
- G01P15/00—Measuring acceleration; Measuring deceleration; Measuring shock, i.e. sudden change of acceleration
- G01P15/02—Measuring acceleration; Measuring deceleration; Measuring shock, i.e. sudden change of acceleration by making use of inertia forces using solid seismic masses
- G01P15/08—Measuring acceleration; Measuring deceleration; Measuring shock, i.e. sudden change of acceleration by making use of inertia forces using solid seismic masses with conversion into electric or magnetic values
- G01P15/125—Measuring acceleration; Measuring deceleration; Measuring shock, i.e. sudden change of acceleration by making use of inertia forces using solid seismic masses with conversion into electric or magnetic values by capacitive pick-up
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a sensor for detecting acceleration or the like acting on a moving body such as a vehicle, and more particularly to a method for easily detecting acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration of a moving body such as a vehicle, and a sensor therefor.
- an occupant protection device is provided as a device for protecting an occupant from a collision of the moving object, and the occupant protection device is provided with a moving device for controlling its operation.
- Body acceleration is required as one piece of information.
- acceleration may be used as one important, so-called basic information in determining the operation control in the operation control of the vehicle itself.
- a vehicle acceleration is configured to be used as one of important basic information in the operation control. Most were.
- research has been conducted to detect the rolling of the vehicle in addition to the acceleration of the vehicle, and to take this into consideration in the operation control of the vehicle. This is because vehicle accidents are caused not only by vehicles but also by fatal occupants caused by rolling of vehicles, which account for 45% of all vehicle accidents. It is based on the survey results.
- sensors for detecting acceleration and the like for example, those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. HEI 8-178952 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H08-30445 are known. Has become.
- a weight body made of silicon is provided rotatably and displaceably between two glass substrates.
- the two glass substrates and the weight body have a so-called three-layer structure. They are common in that they are arranged so that The sensor having such a configuration is configured so that, for example, displacement of the weight due to the action of acceleration is output as a change in capacitance between the electrode and the weight disposed on the glass substrate. Is what it is.
- the part supporting the weight on the two glass substrates is formed of the same silicon member as the weight, and the bonding with the two glass substrates is performed, for example, by the bonding In a state where the portion is heated to a predetermined high temperature (for example, about 400 ° C.), a publicly-known anodic bonding method is often used.
- a predetermined high temperature for example, about 400 ° C.
- FIGS. 22 and 23 show an example of a configuration of a conventional sensor having a so-called three-layer structure as described above.
- Frames 104 and supporting columns 106 supporting the weights 103 ′ are joined to 101 and 102, respectively, and the toe extending from the supporting columns 106 is connected to the frame 104.
- the weight body 103 ' is rotated by the chambers 107a and 107b. And displaceable.
- the glass substrates 101, 102, the frame 104, and the support pillar 106 are separated. Due to the difference in the coefficient of thermal expansion from the silicon to be formed, the portions of the glass substrates 101 and 102 that are not bonded to the frame 104 and the support columns 106 are deformed outwardly convex. In some cases (see Fig. 23).
- Such deformation of the glass substrates 101 and 102 is caused by the weight (not shown) between the weight body 103 'which should be kept constant and the electrodes (not shown) formed on the glass substrates 101 and 102. Changing the interval causes an output error and causes a problem that reliability is impaired.
- An object of the present invention acceleration, another object of the can detect the angular velocity and angular acceleration.
- An object of the present invention is to provide a method for detecting angular velocity and angular acceleration using a multi-sensor.
- Another object of the present invention is to provide a highly reliable acceleration sensor having a simple configuration, capable of reliably maintaining a constant distance between the weight body and the electrode, and having stable output characteristics.
- Another object of the present invention is to provide a robust acceleration sensor which can prevent breakage due to large deflection of the weight due to excessive impact, and another object of the present invention is to provide a viscous air. It is an object of the present invention to provide an acceleration sensor that suppresses damping due to vibration and has good responsiveness at a high frequency. Disclosure of the invention
- a weight plate made of a semiconductor member is provided between two insulating substrates so as to be rotatable and displaceable about a torsion bar.
- a first sensor and a second sensor configured to output capacitance between the electrodes disposed on the two insulating substrates and the weight,
- the torsion bars of each of the first and second sensors are arranged along the vertical direction, and the torsion bars of each of the first and second sensors are arranged on a plane of a plate-shaped member with respect to a predetermined straight line.
- a multi-sensor for basic information on a moving body which is arranged on the plane of the member formed in a plate shape so that each virtual line passing through the center of the sensor at right angles to the sensor forms the same angle.
- the moving object basic information multi-sensor The moving object basic information multi-sensor
- a through-hole is formed in the center of the weight body, and a support pillar formed in a pillar shape is provided inside the through-hole.
- a member is extended and its end is joined to the inner wall of the through hole,
- the support pillar has a thickness in the opposite direction of the two insulating substrates set to be larger than the weight plate, and both ends thereof are joined to the two insulating substrates.
- a first acceleration detecting electrode, a first angular velocity detecting electrode, and a second angular velocity detecting electrode are provided on a surface of the first insulating substrate facing the weight plate.
- the first acceleration detection electrode as a center, the first angular velocity detection electrode is disposed on the left side thereof, and the second angular velocity detection electrode is disposed on the right side thereof, respectively.
- a second acceleration detecting electrode, a third angular velocity detecting electrode, and a fourth angular velocity detecting electrode are provided on a surface of the second insulating substrate opposed to the weight body.
- the third angular velocity detecting electrode is located on the left side
- the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode is located on the right side. Is arranged as
- the capacitance between the second acceleration detection electrode and the weight in each of the first sensor and the second sensor and the capacitance between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight In the case where the difference from the capacitance is the same value, it is determined that the acceleration acts in a direction parallel to a predetermined straight line on the plane of the plate-shaped member, and the electrostatic capacitance is determined.
- the magnitude of the acceleration is determined by the magnitude of the difference in capacitance
- the direction of acceleration is determined by the sign of the difference in capacitance
- the second acceleration detecting electrode and the weight in the first sensor are determined.
- a difference between the capacitance between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight, and the difference between the second acceleration detection electrode and the weight in the second sensor A difference between the capacitance between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight, and the difference between the second acceleration detection electrode and the weight in the second sensor.
- the difference between the capacitance between the first acceleration detecting electrode and the weight between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight Is the opposite sign and the absolute value is the same value, it is determined that the acceleration acts in a direction orthogonal to a predetermined straight line on the plane of the plate-shaped member,
- the direction of acceleration is determined by a combination of the sign of the capacitance difference by the first sensor and the sign of the capacitance difference by the second sensor, and the direction of the acceleration is determined by the first sensor or the second sensor.
- the magnitude of the acceleration is determined by the magnitude of the difference in the capacitance
- the subtraction value from the above is the opposite sign, and the absolute value is the same value, it is determined that the angular velocity having the plane predetermined straight line of the plate-shaped member as the rotation center axis has acted.
- the sign of the subtraction value of the first sensor and the sign of the subtraction value of the second sensor to determine the direction of angular velocity, wherein the subtraction value of the first sensor or the second sensor is determined.
- the magnitude of the angular velocity is determined based on the magnitude of A value obtained by adding a capacitance between the third angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate to a capacitance between the second angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate, and the first sensor A subtraction value between a value obtained by adding a capacitance between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate to a capacitance between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate at ,
- the capacitance between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate is added to the capacitance between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate in the second sensor.
- an acceleration having basically the same configuration Capable of detecting degrees and angular velocities and outputting a capacitance value as a detection output
- capacitance type two sensors are arranged in a predetermined arrangement, and the capacitance of each of the two sensors Acceleration, angular velocity and angular acceleration can be obtained by comparing the magnitude relationship of the output and the sign.
- a weight plate made of a semiconductor member is provided between the two insulating substrates so as to be rotatable and displaceable about the torsion bar, and is disposed on the two insulating substrates.
- the first sensor and the second sensor are connected to the respective torsion bars of the first and second sensors.
- a multi-sensor for basic information on a moving body which is arranged on a plane of the member formed in a plate shape so as to form the same angle, wherein a through-hole is formed in a center of the weight, A support pillar formed in a pillar shape is provided inside the through hole.
- a torsion bar extends from a pair of opposing side surfaces of the side surfaces of the support column, and ends thereof are joined to an inner wall of the through hole;
- the support pillar has a thickness in the opposite direction of the two insulating substrates set to be larger than the weight plate, and both ends thereof are joined to the two insulating substrates.
- a first acceleration detecting electrode, a first angular velocity detecting electrode, and a second angular velocity detecting electrode are provided on a surface of the first insulating substrate facing the weight plate.
- the first acceleration detection electrode is disposed at the center
- the first angular velocity detection electrode is disposed on the left side thereof
- the second angular velocity detection electrode is disposed on the right side thereof, respectively.
- a second acceleration detecting electrode is provided on a surface of the second insulating substrate facing the weight. Pole, a third angular velocity detecting electrode and a fourth angular velocity detecting electrode, with the second acceleration detecting electrode as a center, the third angular velocity detecting electrode on the left side thereof, and the third angular velocity detecting electrode on the right side thereof. 4 angular velocity detecting electrodes are arranged so as to be located respectively,
- a capacitance between the first and second acceleration detecting electrodes and the weight plate; and a capacitance between the first to fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes and the weight. are provided so as to be able to output.
- acceleration and angular velocity having basically the same configuration can be detected, and a capacitance value is output as a detection output. It is characterized in that two sensors are arranged on a flat member so that acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration can be detected by comparing the capacitance outputs of the two sensors. It has.
- the second and third angular velocity detecting electrodes of the first sensor, the first and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes, and the weight are connected to the input stage,
- a first capacitance which is a sum of a capacitance generated between the second angular velocity detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the third angular velocity detection electrode and the weight.
- a second capacitance which is a sum of a capacitance generated between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight.
- a first control unit that calculates and outputs a difference from the angular velocity capacitance;
- the first and second acceleration detecting electrodes of the first sensor and the body are connected to the input stage,
- a second control unit that calculates and outputs a difference between a capacitance generated between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight
- the second and third angular velocity detecting electrodes of the second sensor, the first and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes, and the weight are connected to the input stage,
- the capacitance generated between the first angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor and the weight of the second sensor, the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor, and the second A third control unit that calculates and outputs a difference from a fourth angular velocity capacitance, which is the sum of the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
- the first and second acceleration detecting electrodes of the second sensor and the weight are connected to the input stage,
- a fourth control unit that calculates and outputs the difference between the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
- a first subtractor that calculates and outputs a difference between a calculation output signal of the first control unit and a calculation output signal of the third control unit;
- a first adder that calculates and outputs a sum of the operation output signal of the first control unit and the operation output signal of the third control unit;
- An operation output signal of the second control unit and the fourth control unit A second subtractor for calculating and outputting a difference from a calculation output signal of the trolley unit;
- a second adder that calculates and outputs a sum of a calculation output signal of the second control unit and a calculation output signal of the fourth control unit;
- a low-pass filter connected to an output stage of the first subtractor and passing a signal of a predetermined low frequency band
- a first buffer amplifier that is connected to the output stage of the one-pass filter and performs buffer amplification of an input signal
- a second buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the first adder and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal
- a third buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the second subtractor and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal
- a fourth buffer amplifier connected to the output stage of the second adder and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal.
- the second and third angular velocity detecting electrodes of the first sensor, the first and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes, and the weight are connected to the input stage.
- a first capacitance which is a sum of a capacitance generated between the second angular velocity detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the third angular velocity detection electrode and the weight.
- a second capacitance which is a sum of a capacitance generated between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight.
- a first control unit for calculating and outputting a difference from the angular velocity capacitance;
- the first and second acceleration detecting electrodes of the first sensor and the weight are connected to the input stage,
- a second control unit calculates the difference between the capacitance generated between the second acceleration detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight.
- the second and third angular velocity detecting electrodes of the second sensor, the first and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes, and the weight are connected to the input stage,
- the capacitance generated between the first angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor and the weight of the second sensor, the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor, and the second A third control unit that calculates and outputs a difference from a fourth angular velocity capacitance, which is a sum of the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
- the first and second acceleration detecting electrodes of the second sensor and the weight are connected to the input stage,
- a fourth control unit that calculates and outputs the difference between the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
- a first low-pass filter that allows a signal of a predetermined low frequency band of the operation output signal of the first control unit to pass therethrough;
- a second low-pass filter for passing a signal of a predetermined low frequency band of the operation output signal of the third control unit;
- a first subtractor that calculates and outputs a difference between the output signal of the first mouth-to-pass filter and the output signal of the second mouth-to-pass filter;
- a first adder for calculating and outputting the sum of the operation output signal of the first control unit and the operation output signal of the third control unit;
- a second subtractor that calculates and outputs a difference between a calculation output signal of the second control unit and a calculation output signal of the fourth control unit;
- a second adder that calculates and outputs a sum of a calculation output signal of the second control unit and a calculation output signal of the fourth control unit;
- a first buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the first subtractor and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal
- a second buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the first adder and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal
- a third buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the second subtractor and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal
- a fourth buffer amplifier connected to the output stage of the second adder and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal.
- a weight body made of a semiconductor member is provided between two insulating substrates having electrodes disposed on opposing flat surfaces in accordance with a force applied from the outside.
- the acceleration sensor provided so that the interval of
- a structure provided with a plurality of support pillars penetrating the weight body and having end faces joined to the two insulating substrates.
- the area of the member joined to the two insulating substrates is increased as compared with the conventional case, so that the two The distortion of the insulating substrate is suppressed.
- the weight body is provided with a plurality of through holes corresponding to the number of the plurality of support columns, and the plurality of support columns are made to pass through the plurality of through holes.
- FIG. 1 is a plan view schematically showing a configuration of a multi-sensor for basic information on a moving object and an attached state to a vehicle according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 is an overall perspective view of a disassembled state showing a configuration example of a g- ⁇ sensor configuring a multi-sensor for mobile object basic information.
- FIG. 3 is a plan view of a frame and a body disposed inside the frame.
- FIG. 4 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.
- FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the principle of detecting acceleration by the g- ⁇ sensor alone.
- FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the principle of detecting the angular velocity by the g- ⁇ sensor alone.
- FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the principle of detecting angular acceleration by the g-t sensor alone.
- FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the principle of detecting acceleration by the moving object basic information multi-sensor according to the embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 8 (A) shows that the acceleration along the longitudinal direction of the vehicle acts.
- FIG. 8 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where an acceleration is applied along the lateral direction of the vehicle.
- FIG. 9 shows a multi-sensor for basic information of a moving object according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a principle of detecting an angular velocity according to FIG.
- FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram explaining the principle of detecting angular acceleration by the moving object basic / information multi-sensor according to the embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure of detecting acceleration, angular velocity and angular acceleration by CPU.
- FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration example of the arithmetic unit and a connection example with the first and second g- ⁇ sensors.
- FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram showing another configuration example of the arithmetic and logic units together with the first and second g- ⁇ sensors.
- FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of mounting the first and second g- ⁇ sensors
- FIG. 14 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first mounting example
- FIG. 14 (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second mounting example
- FIG. 14 (C) is a schematic diagram showing a third mounting example.
- FIG. 15 is a plan view of a second layer portion in the first configuration example of the acceleration sensor according to the embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 16 is a longitudinal sectional view of the acceleration sensor according to the first configuration example shown in FIG. 15 taken along the line AA in FIG.
- FIG. 17 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor of the second configuration example.
- FIG. 18 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor of the third configuration example.
- 9 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor according to the fourth configuration example.
- ⁇ FIG. 20 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor according to the fifth configuration example.
- FIG. 22 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor according to the sixth configuration example.
- FIG. 22 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the conventional acceleration sensor.
- FIG. 23 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the conventional acceleration sensor taken along a line BB in FIG. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
- the multi-sensor S for mobile object basic information is provided, for example, at an appropriate position substantially at the center of the vehicle M, and its detection output is used for operation control of an airbag device or the like.
- the moving object basic information multi-sensor s includes two sensors having basically the same configuration, that is, first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51. And the first glass substrate 1 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ constituting the second g— ⁇ sensors 50, 51, etc. (details will be described later). Along the center of each g- ⁇ sensor 50, 51 in the direction perpendicular to the transfer chambers 12A, 13A (12B, 13B) described later.
- the virtual straight lines (see dotted lines in FIG. 1) are provided at appropriate intervals on the substrate 52, which is a plate-shaped member, so that the virtual straight lines (see the dotted lines in FIG. See).
- the arrangement of the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 on the substrate 52 is a straight line passing through the center on the substrate 52 (a straight line represented by a chain line in FIG. 1).
- a virtual straight line passing through the center of the first g— ⁇ sensor 50 in a direction orthogonal to the later-described torsion bar — 1 2 ⁇ , 13 ⁇ of the first g— ⁇ sensor 50 See the dotted line in Fig. 1) and the angle ⁇ , which is perpendicular to the second g- ⁇ sensor 51 1 In the direction, the second g - and the angle theta 2 which forms virtual straight line (see dotted lines in FIG.
- U is the acceleration in the forward direction of vehicle U
- U' is the acceleration in the backward direction of vehicle ⁇
- V is the acceleration in the left direction of vehicle ⁇
- V ' is the acceleration of vehicle ⁇ .
- ⁇ is a roll (rol 1) generated in the vehicle ⁇ , that is, assuming a virtual axis along the front-rear direction of the vehicle M and passing through the center of the substrate 52, the center of this axis is This is an action that causes a rotational motion, in other words, an angular velocity.
- ⁇ ′ is a force (y aw) generated in the vehicle ⁇ , that is, an effect generated by the rotation of the vehicle M, in other words, means an angular acceleration.
- 2 to 4 show specific configuration examples of the first and second g— ⁇ sensors 50 and 51. The configuration and the like will be described below with reference to FIG.
- the first configuration will be described in the following description.
- g the sign of the component of the ⁇ sensor 50, followed by the parentheses to indicate the sign of the corresponding component of the second g — ⁇ sensor 51;
- the description of the configuration of the second g — ⁇ sensor 51 is replaced with the following.
- the horizontal axis of the first and second g— ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 (in the figure, the horizontal direction in the drawing) is the X axis.
- the thickness direction of the second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 (the vertical direction in the drawing) is defined as the ⁇ axis, and the axis perpendicular to the X ⁇ axis is defined as the ⁇ axis.
- the first g- ⁇ sensor 50 (51) is generally called an electrostatic capacitance type, and an electrostatic capacitance is obtained as a detection output.
- the frame 4A (4B) is formed by using silicon to form a shape that appears on the XY plane in a so-called frame shape.
- the first and second glass substrates 1A and 2A (IB, 2B) are joined to the peripheral portions (see FIG. 4).
- the weight 3 A (3 B) is disposed slightly biased to one side in the Y-axis direction, and the weight 3 A (3 B) )
- first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10A (5B to 10B) are arranged at appropriate intervals in the X-axis direction. (See Figures 2 and 3).
- the weight 3A (3B) is formed entirely in a flat plate using silicon. As will be described later, a support column 11A (11B) and a toshiyo provided at the center thereof are provided. Between the first and second glass substrates 1A, 2A (IB, 2B) via the members 12A, 13A (12B, 13B). A, 13 A (12 B, 13 B) is provided so as to be able to rotate around the center (12 B, 13 B) (details will be described later).
- the weight 3A (3B) has a thickness in the Z-axis direction set to be slightly smaller than that of the frame 4A (4B), and the first and second glass substrates 1 A, 2 A (IB, 2 B) and a gap is formed between them (see FIG. 4). At the center of the weight 3 A (3 B), there is a support column 11 A ( 1 1 B) and toe
- the chambers 12A and 13A (12B, 13 ⁇ ) are provided integrally with the weight 3A (3 ⁇ ).
- a through hole 14 A (14 B) of an appropriate size is formed, and a support pillar 11 A (1 B) formed in a column shape is provided substantially at the center of the through hole 14 A (14 B). 1 B) is provided (see FIGS. 2 to 4).
- the support column 11A (11B) has the same thickness in the Z-axis direction as that of the frame 4A (4B), and both end surfaces in the Z-axis direction
- the first and second glass substrates 1A and 2A (IB, 2B) are bonded to each other (see FIG. 4).
- a torsion bar 12A.13A (12B, 13B) is extended from a pair of opposing side portions of the support column 11A (11B), and the end thereof is provided.
- the part is joined so as to be integral with the weight 3 A (3 B) (see FIGS. 2 and 3). That is, in the embodiment of the present invention, among the four side surfaces of the support pillar 11A (11B), the tonsion chambers 12A, 12A, and 12A, from the center of a pair of side surfaces facing each other in the Y-axis direction. 13A (12B.13B) extends in the Y-axis direction (see Fig. 3).
- the torsion bar 12A, 13A (12B, 13B) has a rectangular cross section in the XZ plane. More specifically, the torsion bar 1 2A and 13A (12B and 13B) have a narrower width in the X-axis direction than their length in the Z-axis direction.
- the thickness of the weight 3A (3B) is the same as the thickness in the Z-axis direction (see Fig. 4).
- Both ends of the torsion chambers 12A and 13A (12B, 13B) are connected to the inner wall of the through hole 14A (14B) so that the weight 3 It is formed integrally with A (3B) (see Fig. 2).
- the weight 3A (3B) is rotatable about the torsion bars 12A and 13A (12B and 13B) as described later. It can be displaced in the Z-axis direction.
- the first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10A made of silicon are provided. (5B to 10B) (see Figs. 2 and 3).
- the first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10A are formed in a columnar shape, and the thickness in the Z-axis direction is It is set almost the same as that of (4B).
- the first to sixth electrode connection pillars 5A to 10A (5B to 10B) have end faces in the Z-axis direction, the first to sixth lead pieces 20a to 20f described later. (21a to 21f), and provided on the first and second glass substrates 1A, 2A (IB, 2B) at substantially the center of the end face.
- the corresponding first to sixth wiring connection holes 15 a to 15 f (16 a to 16 f) are arranged.
- first and second glass substrates 1A and 2A (IB, 2B) have substantially the same outer shape and dimensions in the XY plane as those of the frame 4A (4B). Electrodes are formed on the surface facing the body 3A (3B) as described below.
- the outer shape is made rectangular by using a conductive member (for example, IT ⁇ ) on the surface facing the weight 3A (3B).
- the formed first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) is disposed substantially at the center, and a suitable gap is provided on both sides thereof with the first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B).
- the first and second angular velocity detecting electrodes 18 A, 19 A formed in a rectangular shape using a conductive member (for example, IT ⁇ ). (18 B, 19 ⁇ ) are provided (see Fig. 2 and Fig. 4).
- known and well-known manufacturing techniques such as vacuum deposition can be applied.
- the first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) is larger than the first and second angular velocity detecting electrodes 18 A, 19 A (18 B, 19 B).
- the central part is cut out in a rectangular shape so as to avoid contact with at least the end face of the support column 11A (11B). (See Figure 2).
- the first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) and the portion of the weight 3 A (3 B) facing the first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) also has a first angular velocity detecting electrode 18 A (18 B) and a weight body opposed to the first angular acceleration detecting electrode 18 A (18 B).
- a so-called parallel plate capacitor C la at the portion of 3 A (3 B) further includes a second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 A (19 B) and a second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 A
- a so-called parallel plate capacitor C lb is formed between (19 B) and the opposing portion of the weight 3A (3B).
- the first glass substrate 1A (IB) has first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10A (5B to 10B) at positions facing the first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10B, respectively.
- Sixth wiring connection holes 15a to 15f (16a to 16f) are formed (see FIG. 2).
- the first wiring member located at the fourth wiring connection hole 15 d (16 d) side is used. From the edge of the speed detection electrode 17 A (17 B), a fourth lead piece 20 d (2 I d) made of a conductive material is applied.Fourth wiring connection hole 15 d (16 d) It is formed up to the part of the opening (see Fig. 2).
- a sixth member made of a conductive member is formed.
- the lead piece 20 f (21 f) is formed up to the opening of the sixth wiring connection hole 15 f (16 f) (see FIG. 2).
- the first glass substrate 1A (1B) has a seventh wiring connection hole 15g (16) at a position where the end surface of the support pillar 11A (11B) is joined. g) is drilled.
- first to seventh wiring connection holes 15a to 15g (16a to 16g) are filled with a metal material, and the first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to A so-called omic contact is generated between 10 A (5B to 10B) and the support column 11A (11B).
- the first to seventh wiring connection holes 15a to 15g (16a to 16g) are inserted so that a lead wire (not shown) is partially exposed.
- the first lead electrode 17A (17B) and the first and second angular velocity detection electrodes 18A, 19A (1 8B, 19B) can be connected to an external circuit.
- a second acceleration detecting electrode 22A (22B), and third and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes 23A and 24A of a second glass substrate 2A (2B) described later. (23B, 24B) can also be connected to external circuits.
- the first acceleration detecting electrodes 17A (17B) and the first and second acceleration detecting electrodes 17A (17B) are provided on the surface facing the weight 3A (3B). Same shape as second angular velocity detection electrode 18 A, 19 A (18 B, 19 B) Electrodes 22 A (22 B) and third and fourth electrodes for angular velocity detection made of a conductive member (for example, ITO, etc.) having the same dimension.
- a conductive member for example, ITO, etc.
- 23A and 24A are provided (see Fig. 2).
- a known or well-known manufacturing technique such as vacuum evaporation can be applied.
- a so-called parallel plate capacitor C 2a is formed by 3 A (23 B) and the portion of the weight 3 A (3 B) opposed to the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23 A (23 B). , A fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 A (24 B), and a portion of the weight 3 A (3 B) facing the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 A (24 B).
- a so-called parallel plate capacitor C 2b is formed.
- a first lead-out piece made of a conductive member is connected to an end of the third angular velocity detection electrode 23 A (23 B) located on the first electrode connection column 5 A (5 B) side.
- the 20a (21a) force is formed up to a position facing the end face of the first electrode connection column 5A (5B) (see FIG. 2).
- a third lead-out piece made of a conductive member extends from the edge of the second acceleration detecting electrode 22A (22B) located on the third electrode connecting column 7A (7B) side.
- 20 c (21 c) is formed up to a position facing the end face of the third electrode connection pillar 7 A (7 B) (see FIG. 2).
- a fifth pulling electrode made of a conductive member is connected to an end of the fourth electrode for detecting angular velocity 24 A (24 B) located on the side of the fifth electrode connecting pole 9 A (9 B).
- the extension piece 20 e (21 e) is formed up to a position facing the end face of the fifth electrode connection pillar 9 A (9 B) (see FIG. 2).
- the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50.5 1 are such that each of the torsions 12 1, 13A (12B, 13B) is perpendicular to the substrate 52. And a virtual line that passes through the center of the first g- ⁇ sensor 50 and is orthogonal to the torsion bar 12 2.
- the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 having the above-described configuration are preferably manufactured by a so-called well-known and well-known micromachining manufacturing technique.
- the first acceleration detection is performed through a lead wire (not shown) provided in the fourth wiring connection hole 15d (16d).
- the second electrode 17A (17B) is connected to the second acceleration detecting electrode 2 via a lead wire (not shown) provided in the third wiring connection hole 15c (16c).
- 2 A (22 B) is connected to an arithmetic unit 30 provided outside, respectively, while a lead wire (not shown) provided in a seventh wiring connection hole 15 g (16 g) is provided.
- the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C1 and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C2 are input to the arithmetic unit 30.
- the arithmetic unit 30 performs an operation as described later based on the capacitance of each of the parallel plate capacitors CI and C2, and outputs a voltage signal according to the operation result.
- the arithmetic unit 30 having such a function is easily realized by using, for example, a so-called CPU, and is a publicly-known or well-known one.
- the distance between the first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) on the first glass substrate 1 A (IB) and the weight 3 A (3 B) is equal to (See Figure 5).
- 1 is the length of the receivers 12A and 13A (12B.13B) (see Fig. 3)
- E Young's modulus
- I is Toshiyo
- 13A (12B, 13B) is the second moment of area
- b is the width of the torsion bar 1A, 13A (12B, 13B).
- d is the height (thickness in the Z-axis direction) of the total chambers 12A, 13A (12B, 13B) (see Fig. 4)
- F is The force applied to an object weighing m when the acceleration g acts on the object.
- this arithmetic expression is a well-known and well-known formula used when calculating the deflection of a so-called “beam”. It is.
- the acceleration g acts on the so-called parallel plate capacitors C1 and C2, so-called electrode interval, that is, the first acceleration detecting electrode 17A (17B) and the weight 3A (3B) And the capacitance when the distance between the second acceleration detecting electrode 22A (22B) and the weight 3A (3B) is changed can be obtained based on the following basic formula.
- the acceleration g acts as shown in FIG. 5
- the so-called electrode spacing in the parallel plate capacitor C1 is small, so that the capacitance is set to C lg.
- the capacitance is set to C lg.
- the formulas of C lg and C 2g are as follows: The initial capacitance C Bitcoin, the change in capacitance corresponding to the change in the so-called electrode spacing ⁇ m ′ l 3 ′ g Z (2E′b′d 3 ′ d.) ⁇ C. is added when the so-called electrode spacing is reduced, and is subtracted when the so-called electrode spacing is increased.
- the capacitance change is proportional to the acceleration g. Also, as described in the equation for the amount of displacement ⁇ , since the amount of displacement ⁇ is proportional to the acceleration g, it can be said that the change in capacitance is proportional to the amount of displacement ⁇ . .
- the magnitude of the acceleration g can be known by knowing the capacitance change.
- the arithmetic unit 30 calculates the difference (C2g-Clg) between the capacitance changes of the capacitors C1 and C2.
- the arithmetic unit 30 outputs a voltage signal Vout having a magnitude corresponding to the arithmetic value of (C 2g -C lg). That is, this voltage signal V out also takes into account the sign of (C2g-C lg). Even if the absolute value of (C 2g-C lg) is the same, (C2g-C lg) Different voltage values are set in advance when the operation value of is a positive sign and when the operation value is a negative sign, and are output. Therefore, the voltage signal Vout indicates the magnitude and direction of the acceleration g.
- the first angular velocity detecting electrode 18A (18B) is centered on the receiver 12A, 13A (12B, 13B). And the distance between the weight 3A (3B) and the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24A (24B) and the weight 3A (3B) are reduced, and the second angular velocity The distance between the electrode 19A (19B) and the weight 3A (3B) and the distance between the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23A (23B) and the weight 3A (3B) Assuming that an expanding angular acceleration wZdt) acts, let ⁇ be the tilt angle of the weight 3A (3B) from the horizontal state in this case.
- the angular acceleration can be obtained by knowing the amount of change in the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitors C la, C lb, C 2a, and C 2b.
- J is the moment of inertia of the weight 3 A (3 B)
- ⁇ is the angular velocity
- m is the weight of the weight 3 A (3 B)
- L is the weight 3A (3B) is the horizontal length (see Fig. 3)
- D is the vertical length of the weight 3A (3B) (see Fig. 3).
- the weight 3A (3B) is rotated around the torsion angle ⁇ around the toys bar 12 A, 13 A (12 B, 13 B), and the torsion bar
- the torsional moment Mt generated at 12 A, 13 A (12 B, 13 ⁇ ) is expressed by the following equation (6).
- G is the shear modulus of the toy bar 12 A, 13 A (12 B, 13 B)
- IP is the torsion bar 12 A, 13 A (12 B,
- 13 B is the cross-sectional secondary moment of moment
- b is the width of the torsion bar 12 A, 13 A (12 B, 13 B)
- d is the width of the torsion bar 1 2 A
- r means 1 of the lateral length L of the cone 3 A (3 B).
- Equation 11 rearranging using Equation 8 for a shown earlier gives Equation 11 as follows.
- This equation is the initial capacity C.
- capacity variation that corresponds to the change in the so-called electrode interval [ ⁇ m 'l (L - - D') (dco / dt) ⁇ Z ⁇ G ⁇ b ⁇ d (b 2 + d 2) d. ⁇ ] C , is added when the so-called electrode spacing is reduced, and is subtracted when the so-called electrode spacing is increased.
- the capacitance change is proportional to the angular acceleration (d Zdt). Also, as described in the equation for the torsion angle, the torsion angle is proportional to the angular acceleration (dco / dt), so the capacitance change is proportional to the torsion angle a. It can be said that there is.
- the first angular velocity detecting electrode 18A (18B) is connected to the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24A (24B).
- the parallel plate capacitor C lb and the parallel plate capacitor C 2a are connected in parallel, and the total capacity of these two capacitors is input to the arithmetic unit 30.
- C is the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C la and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2b when the angular acceleration is applied, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C lb and the parallel plate capacitor C Assuming that the sum of the capacitances of 2a is C 2 , the arithmetic unit 30 calculates (C no — C,).
- ⁇ Cno ⁇ m ⁇ 1 (L 2 -D 2 ) (dco / dt) ⁇ / ⁇ G ⁇ b ⁇ d (b 2 + d 2) d. ⁇ C. It is expressed as
- the weight 3 A (3 B) rotates in the opposite direction to that shown in FIG.
- the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitors C lb and C 2 a increases, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitors C la and C 2 b is increased.
- the capacity will be reduced. Therefore, the calculated value of ( C2l -C, ⁇ ') is 4 ⁇ C, and the sign is different from the previous case.
- the magnitude of the angular acceleration can be known from the magnitude of the calculated value of (C 2 ⁇ '- C,), and the direction of the angular acceleration can be known from the sign.
- (C,gue) is determined according to the correspondence between the predetermined magnitude and sign of (C 2 , - ⁇ C, profession ′) and the magnitude of the voltage signal V ou ′. , '-C,,), the voltage signal V om is output in accordance with the result of the operation.
- FIG. 7 shows a model obtained by further modeling the first g- ⁇ sensor 50 in a state where it is arranged as shown in FIG. 1. Referring to FIG. I will explain it.
- the virtual g axis is centered on the virtual rotation axis (the two-dot chain line in FIG. 7).
- the angular velocity ⁇ acts in a so-called clockwise direction when the axis is viewed from the near side of the axis of rotation (the side opposite to the end with the arrow of the axis of rotation).
- the direction is orthogonal to the virtual rotation axis and the virtual centrifugal force F 2 acts in a direction away from the rotation axis (see FIG. 7).
- ⁇ 2 ⁇ -(R-r -sin0)
- m is the weight of the weight 3 A (3 B)
- ⁇ is the angular velocity.r is the length of 1/2 of the horizontal length L of the weight 3 A (3 B).
- ⁇ is a virtual center line (indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 7) and a weight 3 A which are parallel to the virtual rotation axis and pass through the center point 0 of the weight 3 A (3 B). This is the angle made with the horizontal axis of (3B) (see Fig. 7).
- F 2 ′ are the components of the centrifugal force F or F 2 in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis of the weight 3 A (3 B) (see FIG. 7).
- the weight 3A (3B) stops when the torsional moment Mt and the preceding rotational moment M are balanced, and rotates by the angle ⁇ with respect to the position before the angular velocity acts. Become.
- Equation 14 Equation 6
- This equation is the initial capacity C.
- the capacitance change corresponding to the change in the electrode spacing ⁇ (1 2 ⁇ ⁇ 1 ⁇ ⁇ 3 ⁇ ⁇ 2 ) / (G-b-d (b 2 + d 2 ) d o) ⁇ C is added when the electrode spacing is reduced, and is subtracted when the electrode spacing is increased c.
- the change in capacitance is proportional to the angular velocity ⁇ .
- the torsion angle ⁇ is proportional to the angular velocity ⁇ , so the change in capacitance is proportional to the torsion angle ⁇ . You can also.
- each electrode is performed as in the case of the angular acceleration. That is, as shown in FIG. 6, the first angular velocity detecting electrode 18 A (18 B) is connected to the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 A (24 B), and the arithmetic unit is connected. 30 is connected to one input terminal, and the second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 A (19 B) and the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23 A (23 B) are connected. 0 Connect to the other input terminal and connect the weight 3 A (3 B) to the ground ⁇ In other words, the rotation of the weight 3 A (3 B) causes the same change in capacitance as the parallel plate The capacitors are connected in parallel. That is, the parallel plate capacitor C la and the parallel plate capacitor C 2b are connected in parallel, and the total capacitance of these two capacitors is input to the arithmetic unit 30.
- the parallel plate capacitor C lb and the parallel plate capacitor C 2a are connected in parallel, and the total capacity of these two capacitors is input to the arithmetic unit 30.
- C and ⁇ are the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C la and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2b when the angular velocity acts, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C lb and the parallel plate capacitor
- the sum of the capacitances of C 2a is C 2 ( Then, in the arithmetic unit 30, (C 2 ⁇ —C, ⁇ ) is calculated.
- the magnitude of the angular velocity can be known from the magnitude of the calculated value of (C ⁇ — c 1 ( ware), and the direction of the angular velocity can be known from the sign thereof.
- FIG. 8 to 10 when the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 are arranged as shown in FIG. 1, in particular, as in FIG.
- the model of the weight 3A (3B) is indicated by a solid line or a dotted line as described below.
- acceleration detection will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (A) and 8 (B).
- Fig. 8 (A) when the forward direction of the vehicle (not shown) is set to the direction shown by the solid line arrow, the acceleration in the opposite direction to the forward direction (in Fig. 8 (A)).
- both the weights 3 3 and 3 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ are in the equilibrium state before the acceleration is applied.
- the vehicle is displaced by the same amount of displacement in the forward direction of the vehicle, in other words, in the direction opposite to the direction in which the acceleration acts (Fig.
- the arithmetic unit 30 outputs the output as described above with reference to FIG. With the voltage signal Vout, the magnitude and direction of the acceleration can be known.
- FIG. 8 (B) when the right direction of the vehicle (not shown) is the direction indicated by the solid arrow, the direction is opposite to the right direction, that is, the left direction.
- an acceleration indicated by a two-dot chain line arrow in FIG. 8 (B) acts, the weights 3 ⁇ and 3 ⁇ of the first and second g— ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 both
- the weight 3 in the first g- ⁇ sensor 50 is different from the case shown in Fig. 8 ( ⁇ ).
- the weight 3 ⁇ of the first g- ⁇ sensor 50 is displaced toward the first glass substrate 1 A, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 1 is increased. This state is indicated by a + sign), whereas the weight 3 of the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 is displaced toward the second glass substrate 2 ⁇ and parallelized.
- the capacitance of the plate capacitor C1 decreases (in FIG. 8 ((), such a state is represented by one symbol).
- the magnitude and direction of the acceleration can be obtained by obtaining the voltage signal Vout from the arithmetic unit 30 for the first and second g ⁇ sensors 50 and ⁇ 1. be able to. That is, for example, the voltage signal by the arithmetic unit 30 based on the output of the first g— ⁇ sensor 50 when the acceleration as shown in FIG.
- the voltage is a predetermined voltage corresponding to the state of being displaced to the ⁇ ⁇ side by a predetermined amount of displacement, it can be determined that acceleration has acted in the direction shown in Fig. 8 ( ⁇ ). Moreover, the magnitude of the acceleration can be known from the magnitude of the voltage signal Vout or Vout2 '.
- the voltage signal obtained by the arithmetic unit 30 based on the output of the first g— ⁇ sensor 50 is obtained by VoiH
- the voltage signal obtained by the arithmetic unit 30 based on the output of the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 is obtained by VoiH
- the voltage signal obtained by the arithmetic unit 30 based on the output of the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 is obtained by VoiH
- a virtual rotation center axis represented by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 9 is the center, and this rotation center axis is a so-called clock when viewed from the near side of the rotation center axis (the tip side with the arrow and the opposite side). It is assumed that angular velocity acts in the circumferential direction.
- the weights 3 ⁇ , 3 ⁇ of the first and second g— ⁇ sensors 50, 51 are in the equilibrium state before the angular velocity acts (the position indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 9). ), The position shifts to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. That is, while the weight 3 ⁇ of the first g— ⁇ sensor 50 is displaced toward the first glass substrate 1 A side with respect to the center point 0 with respect to the center point 0, The right part is displaced toward the second glass substrate 2A.
- the weight 3 B of the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 is centered on the center point ⁇ , and the left part in FIG. The portion on the right side of the center point ⁇ is displaced toward the first glass substrate 1B while being displaced toward the plate 2B.
- the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C la and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2b, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C lb the magnitude relation between C 2 omega is the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2a, C lw> C 2 w , and the is computed by the computing equipment 3 0 described previously (C 2 ⁇ - C, The value of 1U ) is negative. In Fig. 9, such a state is represented by a symbol.
- the magnitude relationship between the voltage signals Vou respectively obtained by the arithmetic unit 30 is also determined by the weight 3A > 3B as described above. Since it depends on the displacement, in other words, on the magnitude and direction of the angular velocity, the direction of the angular velocity can be known from the magnitude relation, and the angular velocity can be known from the magnitude.
- the Rukoto Since it depends on the displacement, in other words, on the magnitude and direction of the angular velocity, the direction of the angular velocity can be known from the magnitude relation, and the angular velocity can be known from the magnitude.
- a so-called counterclockwise direction is set around a virtual center point ⁇ ′ at an equal distance from the first and second g ⁇ sensors 50 and 51.
- angular acceleration (dco / dt) acts on.
- the weights 3 A, 3 ⁇ of the first and second g ⁇ sensors 50, 51 are positioned in an equilibrium state before the angular acceleration acts (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 10). From the position shown in the figure) to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. In other words, the weight 3 A of the first g— ⁇ sensor 50 has its left portion displaced toward the second glass substrate 2 A side in FIG. The portion on the right side of the point O is displaced toward the first glass substrate 1A.
- the weight 3 ⁇ of the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 has a center point ⁇ as a center, and the left portion in FIG. 10 is displaced toward the second glass substrate 2 ⁇ , while the center point ⁇ The portion on the right side of ⁇ ⁇ is displaced to the first glass substrate 1 ⁇ side.
- C lw ′ which is the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C la and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C2b, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C lb the magnitude relation between C 2 Bruno is the sum of the capacitance of the capacitor and the parallel plate capacitor C 2a, C, is computed by the computing unit 3 0 as described in FIG. 6 ⁇ C Bruno, and the first (C '-The value of C,,) is positive. In FIG. 10, such a state is indicated by a + sign.
- the multi-sensor for mobile object basic information includes a voltage signal of each of the arithmetic devices 30 based on the outputs of the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51.
- the magnitude and direction of each of the acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration can be known from the magnitude relation of, but the magnitude relation of each voltage signal is determined using, for example, a so-called CPU. It is preferable that the control is performed by a control device (not shown) provided in the vehicle and performing various so-called electronic controls in the vehicle.
- the CPU configuring the arithmetic unit 30 and the CPU configuring the control device described above are shared, and a series of processing is performed by the CPU. May be performed.
- FIG. 11 shows an example of a basic processing procedure when a series of processing is performed using the CPU in such a manner.
- the processing procedure will be described below with reference to FIG. .
- This series of processes for example, This is executed as a subroutine process in the so-called main routine process.
- the capacitances of the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 are input (see step 100 in FIG. 11). That is, as described earlier with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the parallel plate capacitors C l, C 2, C 1 a, C lb, of the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50, 51 respectively.
- the capacitance values for C 2a and C 2b will be read into the CPU (not shown).
- the difference in the capacitance change is calculated based on the capacitance value input as described above (see step 102 in FIG. 11). That is, previously mentioned as first and second g- omega sensor 5 0, 5 1 of each marked with a (C 2g- C lg), ( C 2 ⁇ - C, ⁇ ) and (C 2 l ,, '— C, ⁇ ) will be calculated respectively.
- the value of sin ⁇ cos® in Equation 14 is no longer “1 Z 2”, and the constant “1 2” in Equation 15 is different from that of the other angles corresponding to the angle at that time. It is a numerical value.
- FIGS. 12 to 14 a configuration of an arithmetic unit to which the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 having the above-described configuration are connected to calculate and output a value such as an angular velocity based on an input signal Examples will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14.
- a value such as an angular velocity based on an input signal Examples
- FIGS. 12 and 13 three-dimensional X, ⁇ , ⁇ by three axes orthogonal to each other. The coordinates will be defined.
- the ⁇ axis runs along the vertical direction.
- the arithmetic unit 30 # in this configuration example includes first to fourth control units (in FIG. 12, "CZU (1)”, “CZU (2)”, “CZU (3)”, 3 1 to 3 4, first and second subtracters 35 and 36, first and second adders 37 and 38, and low-pass fill It is configured to include a receiver 39 and first to fourth buffer amplifiers 40 to 43.
- the first control unit 31 has first and second input terminals 44 a and 44 b for the first C / U, and a first common terminal 44 c.
- the second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 ⁇ of the first g— ⁇ sensor 50 and the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23 A are connected, A first angular velocity detecting electrode 18A and a fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24A are connected to the first CZU second input terminal 44b.
- first common terminal 44 c is used in common with the second control unit 32 described below, and the support column 11 A of the first g—Co sensor 50 is used.
- the connection is made via the conductive material filled in the seventh wiring connection hole 15 g (see FIG. 2).
- the weight 3A is connected to the first common terminal 44c.
- the second angular velocity detecting electrode 1 is connected between the first C terminal U first input terminal 44 a and the first common terminal 44 c.
- Parallel plate capacitor formed between 9 A and weight 3 A Capacitance of C lb and third plate for angular velocity detection 23
- Parallel plate capacitor formed between weight 3 A and weight 3 A The sum of the capacitances of C 2a C ⁇ '(first angular velocity capacitance) is obtained.
- the first control unit 31 calculates and outputs the difference (C 2 , NO ⁇ C) between the above-mentioned capacitance C 2 and capacitance C, and outputs the result.
- the output signal of the first control unit 31 is supplied to the first subtractor 3 5 and the first adder 37, respectively (see Fig. 12).
- the second control unit 32 has first and second input terminals 45 a and 45 b for the second C / U, and a first common terminal 44 c.
- the first g- ⁇ sensor 50 first acceleration detecting electrode 17 ⁇ is connected to the CZU first input terminal 45 a of the second CZU, and the second CZU second input terminal
- the second acceleration detecting electrode 22 A is connected to 45 b.
- the first acceleration detection electrode 1 is connected between the second CZU first input terminal 45a and the first common terminal 44c.
- the capacitance C lg of the parallel plate capacitor C 1 formed between 7 A and the weight 3 A is obtained, while the second CZU second input terminal 45 b and the first common
- the capacitance C 2g of the parallel plate capacitor C2 formed between the second acceleration detecting electrode 22A and the weight 3A is obtained between the terminal 44c and the terminal 44c.
- the second control unit 32 calculates and outputs the difference between the above-mentioned capacitances C 2g and C lg (C 2g ⁇ C lg), and the output signal is It is configured to be input to the second subtractor 36 and the second adder 38, respectively (see FIG. 12).
- the third and fourth control units 33, 34 are for the second g- ⁇ sensor 51, and the third control unit 33 is for the first control unit.
- the fourth control unit 34 has the same configuration and function as the first control unit 32, and the fourth control unit 34 has the same configuration and function as the second control unit 32.
- the third input terminal 46 a for C / U is connected to the second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 ⁇ of the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 and the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23 ⁇ ⁇ is connected, and the third C ZU second input terminal 46 b is connected to the first C ZU.
- the angular velocity detecting electrode 18 B and the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 B are connected.
- the second common terminal 46 c is used in common with the fourth control unit 34 described below, and the support column 11 ⁇ of the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 The connection is made via the conductive material filled in the wiring connection hole 16 g (see Fig. 2). In other words, the weight 3B is connected to the second common terminal 46c.
- the second angular velocity detecting electrode 1 is connected between the third C / U first input terminal 46a and the second common terminal 46c.
- Parallel plate capacitor formed between 9 B and weight 3 B Capacitance of C lb and third plate for angular velocity detection 23
- Parallel plate capacitor formed between weight 3 B and weight 3 B The sum of the capacitances of C 2a, C 2 ( , ⁇ (third angular velocity capacitance), is obtained.
- the third control unit 33 calculates and outputs the difference (C no -C, mecanic) between the above-mentioned capacitance C 2 and the capacitance C lw ′.
- the output signal of the third control unit 33 is input to the first subtractor 35 and the first adder 37 (see FIG. 12).
- the fourth control unit 34 has first and second input terminals 47a and 47b for the fourth CZU and a second common terminal 46c.
- the first acceleration detection electrode 17 ⁇ of the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 is connected to the first input terminal 47 a for ZU, and the second input terminal for C / U is connected to the fourth g— ⁇ sensor 51.
- the second acceleration detecting electrode 22B is connected to 47b.
- the first acceleration detection electrode is provided between the fourth C / U first input terminal 47a and the second common terminal 46c. While the capacitance C lg of the parallel plate capacitor C 1 formed between 17 B and the weight 3 B is obtained, the fourth C ZU second input terminal 47 b and the second Between the second acceleration detecting electrode 22B and the weight 3B between the common terminal 46c and the common terminal 46c of the parallel plate capacitor C2. Become.
- the fourth control unit 34 calculates and outputs the difference between the above-mentioned capacitances C 2g and C lg (C 2g-C lg), and the output signal is It is configured to be input to the second subtractor 36 and the second adder 38, respectively (see FIG. 12).
- the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 obtained in the fourth control unit 34 (C 2g—C lg) is hereinafter referred to as (C 2g—C lg) for convenience. ) I will express it as two.
- the first subtractor 35 is configured to output the calculated force signal (C 2 (—Ch no)) of the first control unit 31 described above and the calculated output signal (C C of the third control unit 33). 2 , no -C, ( ) 2 is input, and the difference between the input signals, that is, ⁇ (C 2 no-C, no) 1 (C 2 no-C, ⁇ ') ⁇ is The operation output signal of the first subtractor 35 is input to the one-pass filter 39. It has become to be.
- the low-pass filter 39 is provided to pass only a signal in a predetermined low frequency band among the frequency components of the operation output signal from the first subtractor 35.
- the filter is set so as to pass a signal having a frequency of 5 to 10 Hz or less.
- the operation output signal of the first subtractor 35 represents the magnitude of the angular velocity.
- the speed of the movement is generally about 500 It is about msec.
- the optimal frequency component of the signal measured by the moving object basic information multi-sensor S according to the present invention is approximately 5 Hz or less.
- a first pass filter 35 is provided at the output side of the first subtractor 35. Have been. As a result, the signal-to-noise ratio is improved.
- the second subtractor 36 is used to calculate the above-described calculated force signal (C 2 g—C lg) of the second control unit 32 and to calculate the fourth control unit 34.
- the output signal (C2g-Clg) is input, and the difference between the input signals, that is, ((C2g-Clg)-(C2g-Clg), ⁇ is calculated. , Is output.
- the operation output signal is output to the outside via the third buffer amplifier 42.
- the second adder 38 outputs the above-described calculated force signal (C 2g—C lg) of the second control unit 32 and the operation output signal (C 2g—C of the fourth control unit 34).
- C lg) 2 and the sum of the input signals, that is, ⁇ (C 2g ⁇ C lg) tens (C 2g—C lg) ⁇ is calculated and output. Has become.
- the operation output signal is output to the outside via the fourth buffer amplifier 43.
- the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 are fixed to a mounting jig 45 having orthogonal plane portions, and first, referring to FIG. As described above, it is assumed that virtual straight lines passing through the centers of the respective g — ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 are arranged at appropriate positions on the vehicle so as to be orthogonal to each other.
- the angle ⁇ 2 between the imaginary straight line passing through the center of the second g — ⁇ sensor 5 1 and the ⁇ axis is set to 45 degrees in the direction orthogonal to It has become something.
- the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 are arranged as shown in FIG. 12 and acceleration acts in the X-axis direction.
- the first g— ⁇ sensor 50 has a direction perpendicular to the weight 3 ⁇ according to the magnitude of the acceleration in the X-axis direction.
- a force acts in the direction of X 1 (see FIG. 12), and in the second g— ⁇ sensor 51, the direction of X 2 that is perpendicular to the weight 3 ((see FIG. 12) The force acts on.
- the second control unit 32 sends a signal (C2g—Clg) according to the force acting in the X1 direction (see FIG. 12) via the second control unit 32.
- (C2g-Clg) is obtained according to the force acting in the X2 direction (see FIG. 12) via the fourth control unit 34.
- the second control unit 32 (C 2g—C lg) and the fourth control unit 34 (C 2 2g—C lg)
- the sum of the two is output from the fourth buffer amplifier 43 as the value of the acceleration in the X-axis direction. That is, in the arithmetic unit 3OA, the output characteristics of the first g—sensor 50 and the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 are taken into account, and so on. From the viewpoint of obtaining a high measured value, the sum of (C2g-Clg) and (C2g-Clg) 2 is made to correspond to the acceleration value in the X-axis direction.
- the operation is basically the same as when the acceleration in the X-axis direction is applied.
- the first g— ⁇ sensor 50 obtained C 2 Bruno - C l (, Roh) or second g- omega obtained by the sensor 5 1 (C 2 Bruno - C,,) one of the 2 only needs to be obtained.
- the first subtractor 35 (C 2 'Bruno - C, omega') and (C 2 Bruno - C, () 2 sum is computed of the angular velocity of the values via the mouth one Pasufiru evening 3 9 and the first buffer amplifier 4 0 and is output as Note that, (C 2 Roh one C, Bruno) and.
- the position of the low-pass filter is not necessarily required to be on the output side of the first subtractor 35, but on the two input sides of the first subtractor 35.
- the first low-pass filter (not shown) and the second mouth-pass filter (not shown) may be provided.
- the first g— ⁇ Either (C 2 physically—C,) obtained by the sensor 50 or (C - ⁇ C, distract) 2 obtained by the second g— ⁇ sensor 51 may be obtained.
- the first adder 37 is used from the viewpoint of improving the measurement accuracy.
- the sum of (C, no-C,, ') and (C 2 ( no C, deliberately) 2 is calculated and output as the value of the angular acceleration through the second buffer amplifier 41. It has become so.
- the arithmetic unit 30A has no difference from that shown in FIG. 12, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.
- the configurations of the first and second g— ⁇ sensors 50 A and 51 A are slightly different as described below. This point is different from the configuration example shown in FIG.
- the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 A and 51 A are the same as the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 shown in FIGS.
- the first and second g— ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 have a structure in which the first glass substrate 1 A (IB) and the frame 4 A (4 B) are integrally formed. Is different from the above configuration example.
- the lid 55A is just the first glass substrate 1A and the frame 4A shown in FIGS. It has a shape and dimensions corresponding to those integrally formed.
- the cover 55 is formed with the first glass substrate 1 ⁇ and the frame 4 ⁇ ⁇ shown in FIGS. It has a shape and dimensions corresponding to those that have been set.
- the mounting jig 48 (see FIG. 12) and the second glass substrates 2 ⁇ and 2 ⁇ (see FIG. 12) are integrally formed.
- the common substrate 56 is made of an insulating member, for example, a glass member, and is formed in substantially the same shape and dimensions as the mounting jig 48 shown in FIG.
- the first and second g— ⁇ sensors 50 and 51 also serve as the second substrates 2 ⁇ and 2 ⁇ .
- the arrangement positions of the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50 A, 51 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ with respect to the common substrate 56 are, as shown by the dotted line in FIG.
- the opposite surface side may be used.
- FIG. 14 (A) shows a case where the fixture (or common board) 57 is arranged in the reverse of the arrangement shown in FIG. That is, the arrangement of the mounting jig (or the common board) 57 in FIG. 14 (A) is the same as that of the mounting jig 48 shown in FIG.
- the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50, 51 (or the first and second g- ⁇ sensors 50A, 50A, 5 1 A) are provided.
- FIG. 14 (B) a mounting tool (or common board) 58 having plane portions 58a and 58b orthogonal to each other just like a T is used.
- the first mounting jig 59a has a first g— ⁇ sensor 50 (or 50 °) force.
- the second mounting jig 59b has a second g— An example is shown in which each of the ⁇ sensors 51 (or 51 A) is attached.
- the first mounting jig 59a and the second mounting jig 59b are different from the previous examples, and are arranged so that separate forces are orthogonal to each other. In that it has been done.
- two identical sensors each having a relatively simple configuration capable of detecting acceleration and angular velocity by themselves are combined so as to have a predetermined arrangement.
- By judging the magnitude relationship between the output signals of the sensors it is possible to know not only acceleration and angular velocity but also angular acceleration without using a sensor having a complicated structure.
- a simple With a simple configuration it is possible to provide a new multi-sensor for basic information on a moving object, which can know not only acceleration and angular velocity but also angular acceleration.
- the individual sensors that make up the multi-sensor for basic information on moving objects are made mainly of silicon, they are so-called semiconductor manufacturing technologies. In particular, mass production using so-called micromachining technology is possible. It is possible to provide a multi-sensor for basic information on a moving object, which has an inexpensive and relatively simple configuration and can detect acceleration, angular velocity and angular acceleration.
- acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration can be detected at one location, dedicated sensors are used for each of acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration, especially in vehicles where the setting space is small and limited. This eliminates the need to provide a vehicle, which not only saves installation space, but also provides not only vehicle acceleration but also angular velocity and angular acceleration for various vehicle controls. ⁇ Next, an acceleration sensor with improved reliability will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 21.
- FIG. 15 to 21 an acceleration sensor with improved reliability will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 21.
- the horizontal direction of the acceleration sensor (the horizontal direction in the figure) is the X axis
- the vertical direction of the acceleration sensor (the vertical direction in the figure) is the vertical direction of the acceleration sensor.
- the Y axis is defined, and the axis in a direction orthogonal to the XY axis is defined as the Z axis, and the same applies to other figures.
- the same components as those of the conventional sensor shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
- This acceleration sensor has a semiconductor member, for example, silicon, between two first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 as two insulating substrates. Weight consisting of 103, frame 104 and the like are provided so as to be sandwiched therebetween, so to say, a three-layer structure is formed (see FIG. 16).
- This acceleration sensor is generally called an electrostatic capacitance type, and can obtain an electrostatic capacitance as a detection output.
- the frame 104 is formed by using a semiconductor member, for example, silicon, and its shape that appears on the XY plane is formed in a substantially frame shape.
- the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 are bonded to the peripheral portions (see FIG. 16).
- the weight 103 is displaced slightly to one side in the Y-axis direction, and the weight 103 and the frame 104. Between them, the first to third electrode connection columns 105a to 105c are arranged at appropriate intervals in the X-axis direction (see FIG. 15).
- the weight body 103 is formed entirely in a flat plate shape using a semiconductor member, for example, silicon. As will be described later, a central support column 106 and a torsion bar 107 a provided at the center thereof are provided. Between the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 via the first and second glass substrates 107 and 107b via the first and second glass substrates 107b and 107b, respectively. It is provided as follows.
- the weight body 103 has a thickness in the Z-axis direction set slightly smaller than that of the frame body 104, and the first and second glass substrates 101, 1 There is a predetermined gap between the gap and the gap 0 2 (see Fig. 16).
- a central support column 106 and torsion bars 107a and 107b are provided integrally with the weight body 103.
- a central through-hole 108 having an appropriate size is formed in order to provide the center support column 106 and the torsion bars 107a and 107b.
- a central support column is provided at approximately the center of the central through hole 108.
- 106 is provided (see FIGS. 15 and 16).
- the thickness of the center support column 106 in the Z-axis direction is set to be the same as that of the frame body 104, and both end surfaces in the Z-axis direction are the first and second ends, respectively.
- the glass substrates 101 and 102 are bonded by, for example, a so-called anodic bonding method (see FIG. 16).
- the center support column 106 has a roughly cruciform shape in the XY plane, and in particular, the Y-axis direction is set longer than the X-axis direction (see Fig. 15) .
- the torsion bars 107 a and 107 b extend from a pair of side surfaces of the central support column 106 facing each other in the Y-axis direction, and the ends thereof are joined to the weight body 103. (See Fig. 15), and the central support column 106 and the torsion bars 107 a and 107 b are formed integrally with the weight 103. is there.
- Each of the transmission bars 107 a and 107 b has a rectangular cross-section on the XZ plane. More specifically, the transmission bars 107 a , 107 b have a smaller width in the X-axis direction than the length in the Z-axis direction. The length of the torsion bars 107a and 107b in the Z-axis direction is the same as the thickness of the weight body 103 in the Z-axis direction (see FIG. 16).
- both ends of the torsion bars 107a and 107b are integrated with the weight body 103 so as to be joined to the inner wall of the central through hole 108. Due to the structure, the weight 103 can rotate around the torsion bars 107a and 107b and can be displaced in the Z-axis direction.
- the weight body 103 four sub-through holes 1109a to 1109d whose XY plane shape is rectangular are formed around the center through hole 1108. . That is, in the first configuration example, one of the central through holes 108 The two sub-through holes 1109a and 109b are provided at appropriate intervals in the Y-axis direction beside the center through hole. Holes 109c and 109d are similarly provided at appropriate intervals in the Y-axis direction (see FIG. 15).
- a semiconductor member for example, a sub support column 110 a to 110 d formed in a prismatic shape using silicon, It is arranged with an appropriate gap between the inner walls of the sub through holes 109 a to 109 d (see FIGS. 15 and 16). That is, the sub-support columns 110a to 110d are loosely penetrated into the sub-through holes 109a to 109d.
- the sub-support columns 110 a to 110 d have the same length in the Z-axis direction as that of the frame 104, and both end faces in the Z-axis direction are These are joined to the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102, respectively.
- the first to third electrode connection pillars 105 a to 105 c are connected to electrodes (not shown) disposed on the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 and to the outside. This is provided for connection of the semiconductor device, and is formed in a columnar shape using a semiconductor member, for example, silicon.
- the length of the first to third electrode connection columns 105 a to 105 c in the Z-axis direction is set to be the same as that of the frame 104 described above.
- the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 each have at least one electrode (not shown) of an appropriate size facing the flat portion of the weight body 103.
- the so-called parallel plate capacitors are formed between each of them and the weight 103.
- the portion facing the sub-through-holes 109a to 109d was cut into a shape similar to the XY plane shape of the sub-through-holes 109a to 109d. Lack Is preferred.
- Electrodes are connected to, for example, the end faces of the first and second electrode connection columns 105a and 105b. Then, for example, on the first glass substrate 101, at the position facing the end face of the first to third electrode connection columns 105a to 105c,? (Not shown) are drilled, and the holes are filled with a metal material, and are electrically connected to the first to third electrode connection columns 105a to 105c, respectively. It has become. At the time of filling the metal material, lead wires (not shown) are embedded so as to be partially exposed to the outside, and the first and second glass substrates 101 are inserted through the lead wires. , 102 can be connected to an external circuit, and the capacitance with the weight 103 can be output.
- the three electrode connection pillars 105 a to 105 c and the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 are joined by, for example, a known / well-known anodic bonding method. It is suitable.
- the formation of the central through hole 108 and the sub through holes 109 a to 109 d, the central support column 106 and the torsion bar 107 a and 107 b, and the sub support column For example, dry etching is suitable for forming 110a to 110d and the like.
- a vertical side wall can be formed by using a silicon wafer having a (110) plane. You can get a pillar with The cross section in the short axis direction (for example, the shape in the XY plane in Fig. 15) is a rhombus.
- acceleration acts in the Z-axis direction.
- the weight 103 is displaced by the inertial force in a direction opposite to the direction in which the acceleration was applied, and the first or second glass substrate 101, 1 located on the side where the weight 103 is located close to.
- the capacitance between the electrode 102 (not shown) and the weight 103 is increased in accordance with the displacement of the weight 103, that is, the magnitude of the acceleration, while the capacitance is located on the opposite side.
- the capacitance between the rotating electrode (not shown) and the weight 103 decreases in accordance with the amount of displacement of the weight 103, that is, the magnitude of the acceleration. Therefore, each capacitance is detected by an external circuit (not shown), and the magnitude of the acceleration can be obtained by obtaining the difference between the capacitances. It is possible to determine in which direction has been applied.
- the distance between the weight body 103 and the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 on which the electrodes are arranged is kept as constant as possible.
- the frame body 104 is bonded to the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102. And only the center support column 106 and the first to third electrode connection columns 105 a to 105 c.
- the frame 104, the central support column 106, the first to third electrode connection columns 105 a to 105 c, and the first and second glass substrates 101, 100 After joining by well-known anodic bonding, when the temperature is returned from the high temperature state at the time of joining to room temperature, the first and the second are caused by the difference in the coefficient of thermal expansion between glass and silicon.
- the second glass substrates 101, 102 are deformed outwardly convexly, and the distance between the first and second glass substrates 101, 102 and the solid body 103, and thus the electrodes There was a problem that the distance from the weight 103 was not the desired value.
- the acceleration sensor according to the embodiment of the present invention. Since the sub-support columns 110a to 110d are provided, the bonding process by the so-called anodic bonding method is completed. The part exposed to high temperature during processing returns to room temperature, and the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 are deformed due to the difference in the thermal expansion coefficient between glass and silicon. Such deformation is suppressed as much as possible by the auxiliary support pillars 110a to 110d, and the distance between the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 and the weight body 103 is substantially desired. It will be kept at the size of.
- the second configuration example includes the sub through-holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub support columns 110 a to 110 d in the first configuration example previously shown in FIGS. 15 and 16.
- the shape of 0d is different, and its arrangement is basically the same as that of the first configuration example.
- the sub through holes 11 1 a to 11 d in the second configuration example are Are drilled in the weight body 103A so that the inner wall surface of the body is cylindrical, and each of the sub-through holes 1 1 1a-; 1 2 d is provided.
- the sub-support columns 112 a to 112 d are formed in a cylindrical shape using a semiconductor member, for example, silicon, and each end face is formed of a first and a second glass substrate 110 1, respectively. , 102. Note that the functions of the sub-support columns 112a to 112d are the same as those of the first configuration example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. Next, a third configuration example will be described with reference to FIG.
- the third configuration example is different from the first configuration example shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 in that the sub through holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub support columns 110 a to 110 d 0d is a different number.
- These six sub-through holes 1 13 a to l 13 f have three sub-through holes 1 13 a to 1 13 c at the side of the central through hole 108, which is appropriate in the Y-axis direction. Three sub-through holes 1 1 are provided at an interval, and are located on the other side of the center through hole 108.
- the basic functions of the sub-support columns 1 14 a to 1 14 f are as follows: There is basically no difference from the first configuration example, but the sub-support columns 1 1 4 a to 1
- the deformation of the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 is suppressed more than in the first configuration example. It will be.
- the fourth configuration example includes the sub-through holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub-support columns 110 a to 110 in the first configuration example previously shown in FIGS. 15 and 16.
- the shape of 0 d is different.
- the sub through-holes 115a to 115d in the fourth configuration example have a so-called L-shape in the XY plane, and are formed in the weight 103C. Have been.
- the sub-support columns 1 16 a to l 16 d are also formed in the so-called L-shape in the XY plane in the same manner as the sub-through holes 1 15 a to 1 15 d.
- the basic functions of the sub-support columns 1 16 a to l 16 d in the fourth configuration example are the same as those in the first configuration example, but the first and second glass substrates 10 16 By making the shape of the end face to be joined to the first and second substrates into a so-called L-shape, the area to be joined to the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 becomes smaller than that of the first configuration example.
- Sub support pillars 1 16 a to 1 16 d Larger than that, so that the deformation of the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 is more effectively suppressed It is.
- the fifth configuration example is different from the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 in that the sub through-holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub support columns 110 a to 110 d are provided.
- the shape of 0 d is different.
- the sub through-holes 117 a to 117 d in the fifth configuration example are formed in an arc shape on the XY plane, and are provided on one side of the central through hole 108.
- the sub through holes 1 17 a and 1 17 b are provided at appropriate intervals in the Y-axis direction, and the sub through holes 1 17 c and 1 17 are provided on the other side of the central through hole 108.
- d are provided at appropriate intervals in the Y-axis direction.
- the sub-support column 1 1 8 ⁇ 1 to 1 1 8 (1 has a shape in the XY plane whose end faces in the two axial directions are the same as the above-described sub-through holes 1 17 a to 1 17 d. It is formed in an arc shape, and is provided at an appropriate distance from the inner wall of the sub through-holes 117a to 117d.
- the area of the end surface in the Z-axis direction of each of the sub-support columns 1 18 a to 1 18 d is different from that of the first configuration example. Since it is set to be relatively large, the deformation of the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 is more effectively suppressed.
- the sixth configuration example is the same as the sub-through-holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub-support columns 110 a to 110 in the first configuration example previously shown in FIGS.
- the shape of 0 d is different.
- the sub through holes 1 19 a to 1 19 d in this sixth configuration example If the shape in the XY plane is formed in a rectangular shape, and its longitudinal axis is supposed to be a radial straight line extending outward from the center of the weight 103 mm, it will follow this straight line. Then, two each are provided on both sides of the central through hole 108.
- the sub-supporting columns 120a to 120d have a rectangular shape in the XY plane at both end surfaces in the Z-axis direction in the same manner as the above-described sub-through holes 1 19a to 119d. And provided at an appropriate distance from the inner walls of the sub through-holes 119 a to 119 d.
- the area of the end surface in the Z-axis direction of each of the sub-support columns 120a to 120d is the same as that of the first configuration example. Since it is set to be relatively large, the deformation of the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 is more effectively suppressed.
- the torsion chambers 107 a and 107 b are assumed to support the weight body 103 as a support beam at both ends. In other words, the weight body 103 is not supported. However, it is not necessary to be limited to such a both-end supporting beam, and for example, a cantilever beam may be used.
- the weights 103, 103 A, 103 B, 103 due to the viscosity of air are provided.
- C The damping (squeezing effect) for 103D and 103E is reduced, and the response at high frequencies is improved. That is, this corresponds to the weights 103, 103A, 103B, 103C, 103D, 103E and the first and second glass substrates 101, 102.
- the sub-through holes 109a to 109d, llla to llld, and 113a to 113d, 1 This is because air flow is generated due to the provision of 15a to 115d, 117a to 117d, and 119a to 119d.
- the structure in which the sub support column 110a and the sub through hole 109a as described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 21 are provided is similar to the structure shown in FIGS.
- the present invention may be applied to a multi-sensor for basic information of a moving object, and has improved reliability as a sensor used for a moving object.
- a plurality of support pillars joined to both insulating substrates are provided between two insulating substrates. Since the substrates face each other via a plurality of support pillars bonded to each other, unlike conventional products, the distortion that the two insulating substrates bend after production is suppressed, and the distance between the two insulating substrates does not change Therefore, the distance between the weight and the electrodes provided on the two insulating substrates is also kept constant, and desired output characteristics can be obtained, and a highly reliable acceleration sensor can be provided.
- the multi-sensor for mobile object basic information is used as a sensor for acquiring information such as acceleration, angular velocity, and the like when the information such as acceleration or angular velocity is required for operation control or the like in a mobile object such as a vehicle.
- the acceleration sensor is more suitable for use in a vehicle or the like, because the acceleration sensor is designed to improve the reliability of the structure.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
- Remote Sensing (AREA)
- Gyroscopes (AREA)
Abstract
Description
明 細 書 移動体基礎情報検出方法及び移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサ並びに加速 度センサ 技術分野 Description Mobile object basic information detection method, multi-sensor for mobile object basic information, and acceleration sensor
本発明は、 車両等の移動体に作用する加速度等を検出するセンサに係 り、 特に、 車両等の移動体の加速度、 角速度及び角加速度を簡易に検出 する方法及びそのためのセンサに関する。 背景技術 The present invention relates to a sensor for detecting acceleration or the like acting on a moving body such as a vehicle, and more particularly to a method for easily detecting acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration of a moving body such as a vehicle, and a sensor therefor. Background art
従来、 例えば、 車両等の移動体においては、 移動体の衝突等から乗員 を保護する装置として乗員保護装置が設けられたものがあり、 この乗員 保護装置には、 その動作制御のために、 移動体の加速度が一つの情報と して必要とされる。 また、 車両自体の動作制御にも加速度が、 その動作 制御を決定する上で、 一つの重要ないわば基礎情報として用いられるこ とがある。 Conventionally, for example, in a moving object such as a vehicle, an occupant protection device is provided as a device for protecting an occupant from a collision of the moving object, and the occupant protection device is provided with a moving device for controlling its operation. Body acceleration is required as one piece of information. In addition, acceleration may be used as one important, so-called basic information in determining the operation control in the operation control of the vehicle itself.
そして、 このような乗員保護装置等に適する様々な加速度センサが提 案されている (例えば、 特開平 9 - 1 7 8 9 5 2号公報等参照) 。 Various acceleration sensors suitable for such occupant protection devices and the like have been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 9-17952).
ところで、 従来、 車両の動作制御や、 いわゆるエアバック装置に代表 される乗員保護装置においては、 車両の加速度を、 その動作制御におけ る重要な基礎情報の一つとして用いるように構成されたものが大半であ つた。 これに対して、 近年、 車両の加速度に加えて、 車両のローリ ング を検出し、 それを車両の動作制御等に加味しょうとする研究がなされて いる。 これは、 車両事故の原因が、 車両同士の以外に、 車両のローリ ン グによる乗員の死亡事故が、 車両事故全体の 4 5 %をも占めるという調 査結果に基づく ものである。 By the way, conventionally, in a vehicle operation control or an occupant protection device typified by an airbag device, a vehicle acceleration is configured to be used as one of important basic information in the operation control. Most were. On the other hand, in recent years, research has been conducted to detect the rolling of the vehicle in addition to the acceleration of the vehicle, and to take this into consideration in the operation control of the vehicle. This is because vehicle accidents are caused not only by vehicles but also by fatal occupants caused by rolling of vehicles, which account for 45% of all vehicle accidents. It is based on the survey results.
しかしながら、 従来の加速度センサ等には、 移動体のいわゆる基礎情 報としての加速度、 角速度及び角加速度を一つのセンサで可能とし、 し かも、 大量生産に適するものが皆無であった。 However, no conventional acceleration sensor or the like enables acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration as so-called basic information of a moving object with a single sensor, and none of them are suitable for mass production.
また、 加速度等の検出のためのセンサとしては、 例えば、 特開平 8— 1 7 8 9 5 2号公報ゃ特開平 8 — 3 0 4 4 5号公報等に示されたものが 公知 · 周知となっている。 In addition, as sensors for detecting acceleration and the like, for example, those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. HEI 8-178952 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H08-30445 are known. Has become.
これらの従来のセンサは、 2枚のガラス基板の間に、 シリコンを用い てなる錘体を回動及び変位可能に設けてなるもので、 2枚のガラス基板 及び錘体が、 いわば三層構造をなすように配された点において共通する ものである。 そして、 かかる構成を有してなるセンサは、 例えば、 加速 度の作用による錘体の変位が、 ガラス基板に配設された電極と錘体との 間の静電容量変化として出力されるようになっているものである。 In these conventional sensors, a weight body made of silicon is provided rotatably and displaceably between two glass substrates. The two glass substrates and the weight body have a so-called three-layer structure. They are common in that they are arranged so that The sensor having such a configuration is configured so that, for example, displacement of the weight due to the action of acceleration is output as a change in capacitance between the electrode and the weight disposed on the glass substrate. Is what it is.
ところで、 上述の従来のセンサにおいて、 錘を 2枚のガラス基板に支 持する部位は、 錘と同じシリ コン部材から形成されており、 2枚のガラ ス基板との接合は、 例えば、 その接合部分を所定の高温 (例えば 4 0 0 °C程度) に加熱した状態において、 公知 · 周知のいわゆる陽極接合法 を用いて行われることが多い。 By the way, in the above-mentioned conventional sensor, the part supporting the weight on the two glass substrates is formed of the same silicon member as the weight, and the bonding with the two glass substrates is performed, for example, by the bonding In a state where the portion is heated to a predetermined high temperature (for example, about 400 ° C.), a publicly-known anodic bonding method is often used.
しかしながら、 ガラス基板とシリ コンとの接合においては、 両者の熱 膨張係数が異なるために、 室温に戻った際に歪みを生じてしまうという 不都合がある。 However, there is an inconvenience in joining the glass substrate and the silicon, since the two have different coefficients of thermal expansion, so that when the temperature is returned to room temperature, distortion occurs.
すなわち、 図 2 2及び図 2 3には、 上述のようにいわゆる 3層構造を 有する従来センサの一構成例が示されており、 同図を参照しつつ説明す れば、 2枚のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2には、 枠体 1 0 4と、 錘体 1 0 3 ' を支持する支持柱 1 0 6 とが接合されて、 支持柱 1 0 6から延設さ れたト一シヨ ンバー 1 0 7 a , 1 0 7 bによって錘体 1 0 3 ' が回動及 び変位可能に設けられたものとなっている。 That is, FIGS. 22 and 23 show an example of a configuration of a conventional sensor having a so-called three-layer structure as described above. Frames 104 and supporting columns 106 supporting the weights 103 ′ are joined to 101 and 102, respectively, and the toe extending from the supporting columns 106 is connected to the frame 104. The weight body 103 'is rotated by the chambers 107a and 107b. And displaceable.
かかる構成を有するセンサにおいて、 陽極接合法による接合処理が終 了し、 接合部分の温度が室温に戻ると、 ガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2 と枠 体 1 0 4及び支持柱 1 0 6を形成するシリ コンとの熱膨張係数の違いに 起因して、 枠体 1 0 4や支持柱 1 0 6 と接合されていないガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2の部位が外側に凸状に変形するような歪みを生ずることが ある (図 2 3参照) 。 In the sensor having such a configuration, when the bonding process by the anodic bonding method is completed and the temperature of the bonded portion returns to room temperature, the glass substrates 101, 102, the frame 104, and the support pillar 106 are separated. Due to the difference in the coefficient of thermal expansion from the silicon to be formed, the portions of the glass substrates 101 and 102 that are not bonded to the frame 104 and the support columns 106 are deformed outwardly convex. In some cases (see Fig. 23).
かかるガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2の変形は、 本来一定に保持されるべ き錘体 1 0 3 ' とガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2 に形成された電極 (図示せ ず) との間隔を変えることとなり、 出力誤差を招き、 信頼性を損ねると いう問題を生ずる。 Such deformation of the glass substrates 101 and 102 is caused by the weight (not shown) between the weight body 103 'which should be kept constant and the electrodes (not shown) formed on the glass substrates 101 and 102. Changing the interval causes an output error and causes a problem that reliability is impaired.
本発明の目的は、 加速度、 角速度及び角加速度を検出することができ. 大量生産に適する移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサを提供することにある ( 本発明の他の目的は、 移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサを用いた加速度. 角速度及び角加速度の検出方法を提供することにある。 An object of the present invention, acceleration, another object of the can detect the angular velocity and angular acceleration. To provide a multi-sensor for mobile basic information suitable for mass production (the invention for mobile basic information An object of the present invention is to provide a method for detecting angular velocity and angular acceleration using a multi-sensor.
本発明の他の目的は、 簡易な構成により、 錘体と電極との間隔を確実 に一定に保持することができ、 出力特性の安定した信頼性の高い加速度 センサを提供することにある。 Another object of the present invention is to provide a highly reliable acceleration sensor having a simple configuration, capable of reliably maintaining a constant distance between the weight body and the electrode, and having stable output characteristics.
本発明の他の目的は、 過度の衝撃による錘体の大きな振れに起因する 破損を防止することができ、 堅牢な加速度センサを提供することにある, 本発明の他の目的は、 空気の粘性によるダンピングを抑圧し、 高い周 波数での応答性の良好な加速度センサを提供することにある。 発明の開示 Another object of the present invention is to provide a robust acceleration sensor which can prevent breakage due to large deflection of the weight due to excessive impact, and another object of the present invention is to provide a viscous air. It is an object of the present invention to provide an acceleration sensor that suppresses damping due to vibration and has good responsiveness at a high frequency. Disclosure of the invention
第 1 の発明の形態によれば、 2つの絶縁基板の間に、 半導体部材から なる錘板がトーシヨ ンバーを中心に回動及び変位可能に設けられると共 に、 前記 2つの絶縁基板に配設された電極と前記錘体との間の静電容量 が出力可能に構成されてなる第 1 のセンサ及び第 2のセンサを、 According to the first aspect of the invention, a weight plate made of a semiconductor member is provided between two insulating substrates so as to be rotatable and displaceable about a torsion bar. A first sensor and a second sensor configured to output capacitance between the electrodes disposed on the two insulating substrates and the weight,
前記第 1及び第 2のセンサの各々のトーシヨ ンバーが鉛直方向に沿う ようにし、 かつ、 平板状に形成された部材の平面上において、 所定の直 線に対して、 前記各々の ト一シヨ ンバーに直交してセンサの中心を通る 各々の仮想的な線が同一角度をなすように、 前記平板状に形成された部 材の平面上に配してなる移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサを用いて移動体 の加速度、 角速度及び角加速度を検出する移動体基礎情報検出方法であ つて、 The torsion bars of each of the first and second sensors are arranged along the vertical direction, and the torsion bars of each of the first and second sensors are arranged on a plane of a plate-shaped member with respect to a predetermined straight line. Using a multi-sensor for basic information on a moving body, which is arranged on the plane of the member formed in a plate shape so that each virtual line passing through the center of the sensor at right angles to the sensor forms the same angle. A method for detecting basic information of a moving object for detecting acceleration, angular velocity and angular acceleration of the moving object,
前記移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサは、 The moving object basic information multi-sensor,
前記錘体の中央に、 貫通孔が穿設され、 当該貫通孔の内側には、 柱状 に形成された支持柱が設けられ、 前記支持柱の側面の内、 対向する一組 の側面からそれぞれトーシヨ ンバーが延設されて、 その端部は、 前記貫 通孔の内壁に接合され、 A through-hole is formed in the center of the weight body, and a support pillar formed in a pillar shape is provided inside the through-hole. A member is extended and its end is joined to the inner wall of the through hole,
前記支持柱は、 前記 2つの絶縁基板の対向方向における厚みが、 前記 錘板より大に設定されて、 その両端部が前記 2つの絶縁基板に接合され る一方、 The support pillar has a thickness in the opposite direction of the two insulating substrates set to be larger than the weight plate, and both ends thereof are joined to the two insulating substrates.
前記 2つの絶縁基板の内、 第 1 の絶縁基板の前記錘板と対向する面に は、 第 1 の加速度検出用電極、 第 1 の角速度検出用電極及び第 2の角速 度検出用電極が、 前記第 1 の加速度検出用電極を中央にして、 その左側 に前記第 1 の角速度検出用電極が、 その右側に前記第 2の角速度検出用 電極が、 それぞれ位置するように配設され、 Of the two insulating substrates, a first acceleration detecting electrode, a first angular velocity detecting electrode, and a second angular velocity detecting electrode are provided on a surface of the first insulating substrate facing the weight plate. With the first acceleration detection electrode as a center, the first angular velocity detection electrode is disposed on the left side thereof, and the second angular velocity detection electrode is disposed on the right side thereof, respectively.
第 2の絶縁基板の前記錘体と対向する面には、 第 2の加速度検出用電 極、 第 3の角速度検出用電極及び第 4の角速度検出用電極が、 前記第 2 の加速度検出用電極を中央にして、 その左側に前記第 3の角速度検出用 電極が、 その右側に前記第 4の角速度検出用電極が、 それぞれ位置する ように配設され、 A second acceleration detecting electrode, a third angular velocity detecting electrode, and a fourth angular velocity detecting electrode are provided on a surface of the second insulating substrate opposed to the weight body. , The third angular velocity detecting electrode is located on the left side, and the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode is located on the right side. Is arranged as
前記第 1及び第 2の加速度検出用電極と前記錘板との間の各々の静電 容量と、 前記第 1乃至第 4の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間の各々 の静電容量とを出力可能としてなるものであって、 A capacitance between the first and second acceleration detecting electrodes and the weight plate; and a capacitance between the first to fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes and the weight. And can be output,
前記第 1 のセンサ及び前記第 2のセンサの各々における前記第 2の加 速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間の静電容量と前記第 1 の加速度検出用 電極と前記錘体との間の静電容量との差が同一値である場合には、 前記 平板状に形成された部材の平面上の所定の直線に平行する方向に作用す る加速度であると判定すると共に、 前記静電容量の差の大きさにより加 速度の大きさを、 前記静電容量の差の符号により加速度の方向を判定し, 前記第 1 のセンサにおける前記第 2の加速度検出用電極と前記錘体と の間の静電容量と前記第 1 の加速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間の静電 容量との差と、 前記第 2のセンサにおける前記第 2の加速度検出用電極 と前記錘体との間の静電容量と前記第 1 の加速度検出用電極と前記錘体 との間の静電容量との差とが逆符号で、 その絶対値が同一値となる場合 には、 前記平板状に形成された部材の平面上の所定の直線に直交する方 向に作用する加速度であると判定すると共に、 前記第 1 のセンサによる 前記静電容量の差の符号と前記第 2のセンサによる前記静電容量の差の 符号との組み合わせによって加速度の方向を判定し、 前記第 1 のセンサ 又は前記第 2のセンサによる前記静電容量の差の大きさによって加速度 の大きさを判定し、 The capacitance between the second acceleration detection electrode and the weight in each of the first sensor and the second sensor and the capacitance between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight In the case where the difference from the capacitance is the same value, it is determined that the acceleration acts in a direction parallel to a predetermined straight line on the plane of the plate-shaped member, and the electrostatic capacitance is determined. The magnitude of the acceleration is determined by the magnitude of the difference in capacitance, the direction of acceleration is determined by the sign of the difference in capacitance, and the second acceleration detecting electrode and the weight in the first sensor are determined. A difference between the capacitance between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight, and the difference between the second acceleration detection electrode and the weight in the second sensor. And the difference between the capacitance between the first acceleration detecting electrode and the weight between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight. Is the opposite sign and the absolute value is the same value, it is determined that the acceleration acts in a direction orthogonal to a predetermined straight line on the plane of the plate-shaped member, The direction of acceleration is determined by a combination of the sign of the capacitance difference by the first sensor and the sign of the capacitance difference by the second sensor, and the direction of the acceleration is determined by the first sensor or the second sensor. The magnitude of the acceleration is determined by the magnitude of the difference in the capacitance,
前記第 1 のセンサにおける第 2の角速度検出用電極と前記錘板との間 の静電容量に前記第 3の角速度検出用電極と前記錘板との間の静電容量 を加算した値と、 前記第 1のセンサにおける前記第 1の角速度検出用電 極と前記錘板との間の静電容量に前記第 4の角速度検出用電極と前記錘 板との間の静電容量を加算した値との減算値と、 前記第 2のセンサにおける第 2の角速度検出用電極と前記錘板との間 の静電容量に前記第 3の角速度検出用電極と前記錘板との間の静電容量 を加算した値と、 前記第 2のセンサにおける前記第 1の角速度検出用電 極と前記錘板との間の静電容量に前記第 4の角速度検出用電極と前記錘 板との間の静電容量を加算した値との減算値とが逆符号で、 その絶対値 が同一値となる場合には、 前記平板状に形成された部材の平面状の所定 の直線を回転中心軸とする角速度が作用したと判定すると共に、 前記第 1 のセンサの前記減算値の符号と前記第 2のセンサの前記減算値の符号 との組み合わせによって角速度の方向を判定し、 前記第 1 のセンサ又は 第 2のセンサの前記減算値の大きさによって角速度の大きさを判定し、 前記第 1 のセンサにおける前記第 2の角速度検出用電極と前記錘板と の間の静電容量に前記第 3の角速度検出用電極と前記錘板との間の静電 容量を加算した値と、 前記第 1のセンサにおける前記第 1の角速度検出 用電極と前記錘板との間の静電容量に前記第 4の角速度検出用電極と前 記錘板との間の静電容量を加算した値との減算値と、 A value obtained by adding the capacitance between the third angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate to the capacitance between the second angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate in the first sensor; A value obtained by adding the capacitance between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate to the capacitance between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate in the first sensor. And the subtracted value of A value obtained by adding the capacitance between the third angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate to the capacitance between the second angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate in the second sensor; A value obtained by adding the capacitance between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate to the capacitance between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate in the second sensor. In the case where the subtraction value from the above is the opposite sign, and the absolute value is the same value, it is determined that the angular velocity having the plane predetermined straight line of the plate-shaped member as the rotation center axis has acted. Together with the sign of the subtraction value of the first sensor and the sign of the subtraction value of the second sensor to determine the direction of angular velocity, wherein the subtraction value of the first sensor or the second sensor is determined. The magnitude of the angular velocity is determined based on the magnitude of A value obtained by adding a capacitance between the third angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate to a capacitance between the second angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate, and the first sensor A subtraction value between a value obtained by adding a capacitance between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate to a capacitance between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate at ,
前記第 2のセンサにおける前記第 2の角速度検出用電極と前記錘板と の間の静電容量に前記第 3の角速度検出用電極と前記錘板との間の静電 容量を加算した値と、 前記第 2のセンサにおける前記第 1の角速度検出 用電極と前記錘板との間の静電容量に前記第 4の角速度検出用電極と前 記錘板との間の静電容量を加算した値との減算値とが同一値となる場合 には、 前記第 1 のセンサと前記第 2のセンサから等距離にある所定の点 を中心にした角加速度が作用したと判定すると共に、 前記第 1及び第 2 のセンサにおける前記減算値の符号によって角加速度の方向を判定し、 前記第 1のセンサ又は前記第 2のセンサの前記減算値の大きさによって 角加速度の大きさを判定するよう構成されてなるものが提供される。 かかる構成においては、 特に、 基本的に同一の構成を有してなる加速 度及び角速度の検出が可能で、 検出出力として静電容量値を出力するい わゆる静電容量型と称される 2つのセンサを所定の配置にして、 その 2 つのセンサの各々の静電容量出力の大小関係、 符号を比較することで加 速度、 角速度及び角加速度を知ることができるようにしたものである。 第 2の発明の形態によれば、 2つの絶縁基板の間に、 半導体部材から なる錘板がトーショ ンバ一を中心に回動及び変位可能に設けられると共 に、 前記 2つの絶縁基板に配設された電極と前記錘体との間の静電容量 が出力可能に構成されてなる第 1 のセンサ及び第 2のセンサを、 前記第 1及び第 2のセンサの各々の 卜一ショ ンバーが鉛直方向に沿う ようにし、 かつ、 平板状に形成された部材の平面上において、 所定の直 線に対して、 前記各々の トーショ ンバーに直交してセンサの中心を通る 各々の仮想的な線が同一角度をなすように、 前記平板状に形成された部 材の平面上に配してなる移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサであって、 前記錘体の中央には、 貫通孔が穿設され、 当該貫通孔の内側には、 柱 状に形成された支持柱が設けられ、 前記支持柱の側面の内、 対向する一 組の側面からそれぞれト一シヨ ンバーが延設されて、 その端部は、 前記 貫通孔の内壁に接合され、 A value obtained by adding the capacitance between the third angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate to the capacitance between the second angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate in the second sensor. The capacitance between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate is added to the capacitance between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight plate in the second sensor. When the subtraction value from the value is the same value, it is determined that an angular acceleration centered on a predetermined point equidistant from the first sensor and the second sensor has acted, and The direction of angular acceleration is determined by the sign of the subtraction value in the first and second sensors, and the magnitude of the angular acceleration is determined by the magnitude of the subtraction value of the first sensor or the second sensor. What is done is provided. In such a configuration, in particular, an acceleration having basically the same configuration Capable of detecting degrees and angular velocities and outputting a capacitance value as a detection output So-called capacitance type two sensors are arranged in a predetermined arrangement, and the capacitance of each of the two sensors Acceleration, angular velocity and angular acceleration can be obtained by comparing the magnitude relationship of the output and the sign. According to the second aspect of the present invention, a weight plate made of a semiconductor member is provided between the two insulating substrates so as to be rotatable and displaceable about the torsion bar, and is disposed on the two insulating substrates. The first sensor and the second sensor, each of which is configured to be able to output the capacitance between the provided electrode and the weight, are connected to the respective torsion bars of the first and second sensors. Each virtual line that passes along the vertical direction and passes through the center of the sensor at right angles to each of the torsion bars with respect to a predetermined straight line on the plane of the plate-shaped member. A multi-sensor for basic information on a moving body, which is arranged on a plane of the member formed in a plate shape so as to form the same angle, wherein a through-hole is formed in a center of the weight, A support pillar formed in a pillar shape is provided inside the through hole. A torsion bar extends from a pair of opposing side surfaces of the side surfaces of the support column, and ends thereof are joined to an inner wall of the through hole;
前記支持柱は、 前記 2つの絶縁基板の対向方向における厚みが、 前記 錘板より大に設定されて、 その両端部が前記 2つの絶縁基板に接合され る一方、 The support pillar has a thickness in the opposite direction of the two insulating substrates set to be larger than the weight plate, and both ends thereof are joined to the two insulating substrates.
前記 2つの絶縁基板の内、 第 1 の絶縁基板の前記錘板と対向する面に は、 第 1 の加速度検出用電極、 第 1 の角速度検出用電極及び第 2の角速 度検出用電極が、 前記第 1の加速度検出用電極を中央にして、 その左側 に前記第 1 の角速度検出用電極が、 その右側に前記第 2の角速度検出用 電極が、 それぞれ位置するように配設され、 Of the two insulating substrates, a first acceleration detecting electrode, a first angular velocity detecting electrode, and a second angular velocity detecting electrode are provided on a surface of the first insulating substrate facing the weight plate. The first acceleration detection electrode is disposed at the center, the first angular velocity detection electrode is disposed on the left side thereof, and the second angular velocity detection electrode is disposed on the right side thereof, respectively.
第 2の絶縁基板の前記錘体と対向する面には、 第 2の加速度検出用電 極、 第 3の角速度検出用電極及び第 4の角速度検出用電極が、 前記第 2 の加速度検出用電極を中央にして、 その左側に前記第 3の角速度検出用 電極が、 その右側に前記第 4の角速度検出用電極が、 それぞれ位置する ように配設され、 A second acceleration detecting electrode is provided on a surface of the second insulating substrate facing the weight. Pole, a third angular velocity detecting electrode and a fourth angular velocity detecting electrode, with the second acceleration detecting electrode as a center, the third angular velocity detecting electrode on the left side thereof, and the third angular velocity detecting electrode on the right side thereof. 4 angular velocity detecting electrodes are arranged so as to be located respectively,
前記第 1及び第 2の加速度検出用電極と前記錘板との間の各々の静電 容量と、 前記第 1乃至第 4の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間の各々 の静電容量とを出力可能としてなるものが提供される。 A capacitance between the first and second acceleration detecting electrodes and the weight plate; and a capacitance between the first to fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes and the weight. Are provided so as to be able to output.
かかる構成においては、 特に、 基本的に同一の構成を有してなる加速 度及び角速度の検出が可能で、 検出出力として静電容量値を出力するい わゆる静電容量型と称される 2つのセンサを、 その 2つのセンサのそれ ぞれの静電容量出力を対比して加速度、 角速度及び角加速度の検出が可 能となるように、 平板状の部材上に配置してなる点において特徴を有す るものである。 In such a configuration, particularly, acceleration and angular velocity having basically the same configuration can be detected, and a capacitance value is output as a detection output. It is characterized in that two sensors are arranged on a flat member so that acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration can be detected by comparing the capacitance outputs of the two sensors. It has.
より好ましい実施形態として、 第 1 のセンサの第 2及び第 3の角速度 検出用電極と、 第 1 及び第 4の角速度検出用電極と、 錘体とが入力段に 接続され、 As a more preferred embodiment, the second and third angular velocity detecting electrodes of the first sensor, the first and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes, and the weight are connected to the input stage,
前記第 2の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量と前 記第 3の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との和で ある第 1の角速度静電容量と、 A first capacitance which is a sum of a capacitance generated between the second angular velocity detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the third angular velocity detection electrode and the weight. Angular velocity capacitance,
前記第 1 の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量と前 記第 4の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との和で ある第 2の角速度静電容量との差を演算して出力する第 1のコン トロー ルュニッ 卜と、 A second capacitance which is a sum of a capacitance generated between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight. A first control unit that calculates and outputs a difference from the angular velocity capacitance;
第 1 のセンサの第 1及び第 2の加速度検出用電極と、 锤体とが入力段 に接続され、 The first and second acceleration detecting electrodes of the first sensor and the body are connected to the input stage,
前記第 2の加速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量と、 前記第 1 の加速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との差 を演算して出力する第 2のコン トロールュニッ 卜と、 Capacitance generated between the second acceleration detection electrode and the weight, A second control unit that calculates and outputs a difference between a capacitance generated between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight, and
第 2のセンサの第 2及び第 3の角速度検出用電極と、 第 1及び第 4の 角速度検出用電極と、 錘体とが入力段に接続され、 The second and third angular velocity detecting electrodes of the second sensor, the first and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes, and the weight are connected to the input stage,
前記第 2のセンサの第 2の角速度検出用電極と前記第 2のセンサの錘 体との間に生ずる静電容量と前記第 2のセンサの第 3の角速度検出用電 極と前記第 2のセンサの錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との和である第 3 の角速度静電容量と、 The capacitance generated between the second angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor and the weight of the second sensor, the third angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor, and the second A third angular velocity capacitance, which is the sum of the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
前記第 2のセンサの第 1 の角速度検出用電極と前記第 2のセンサの錘 体との間に生ずる静電容量と前記第 2のセンサの第 4の角速度検出用電 極と前記第 2のセンサの錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との和である第 4 の角速度静電容量との差を演算して出力する第 3のコントロールュニッ 卜と、 The capacitance generated between the first angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor and the weight of the second sensor, the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor, and the second A third control unit that calculates and outputs a difference from a fourth angular velocity capacitance, which is the sum of the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
第 2のセンサの第 1及び第 2の加速度検出用電極と、 錘体とが入力段 に接続され、 The first and second acceleration detecting electrodes of the second sensor and the weight are connected to the input stage,
前記第 2のセンサの第 2の加速度検出用電極と前記第 2のセンサの錘 体との間に生ずる静電容量と、 前記第 2のセンサの第 1 の加速度検出用 電極と前記第 2のセンサの錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との差を演算し て出力する第 4のコン トロールュニッ 卜と、 A capacitance generated between a second acceleration detecting electrode of the second sensor and a weight of the second sensor; and a first acceleration detecting electrode of the second sensor and the second acceleration detecting electrode. A fourth control unit that calculates and outputs the difference between the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
前記第 1 のコントロールユニッ トの演算出力信号と、 前記第 3のコン トロールュニッ 卜の演算出力信号との差を演算して出力する第 1 の減算 器と、 A first subtractor that calculates and outputs a difference between a calculation output signal of the first control unit and a calculation output signal of the third control unit;
前記第 1のコントロールュニッ 卜の演算出力信号と、 前記第 3のコン トロールユニッ トの演算出力信号との和を演算して出力する第 1の加算 器と、 A first adder that calculates and outputs a sum of the operation output signal of the first control unit and the operation output signal of the third control unit;
前記第 2のコントロールュニッ 卜の演算出力信号と、 前記第 4のコン トロールュニッ 卜の演算出力信号との差を演算して出力する第 2の減算 器と、 An operation output signal of the second control unit and the fourth control unit; A second subtractor for calculating and outputting a difference from a calculation output signal of the trolley unit;
前記第 2のコントロールユニッ トの演算出力信号と前記第 4のコン ト ロールュニッ 卜の演算出力信号との和を演算して出力する第 2の加算器 と、 A second adder that calculates and outputs a sum of a calculation output signal of the second control unit and a calculation output signal of the fourth control unit;
前記第 1 の減算器の出力段に接続され、 所定の低域周波数帯の信号を 通過せしめるローパスフィル夕と、 A low-pass filter connected to an output stage of the first subtractor and passing a signal of a predetermined low frequency band;
前記口一パスフィル夕の出力段に接続され、 入力信号の緩衝増幅を行 う第 1 の緩衝増幅器と、 A first buffer amplifier that is connected to the output stage of the one-pass filter and performs buffer amplification of an input signal;
前記第 1 の加算器の出力段に接続され、 入力信号の緩衝増幅を行う第 2の緩衝増幅器と、 A second buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the first adder and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal;
前記第 2の減算器の出力段に接続され、 入力信号の緩衝増幅を行う第 3の緩衝増幅器と、 A third buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the second subtractor and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal;
前記第 2の加算器の出力段に接続され、 入力信号の緩衝増幅を行う第 4の緩衝増幅器と、 を具備してなる演算装置を設けた移動体基礎情報用 マルチセンサが提供される。 And a fourth buffer amplifier connected to the output stage of the second adder and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal.
さらに、 より好ましい第 2の実施形態として、 第 1 のセンサの第 2及 び第 3の角速度検出用電極と、 第 1 及び第 4の角速度検出用電極と、 錘 体とが入力段に接続され、 Further, as a more preferred second embodiment, the second and third angular velocity detecting electrodes of the first sensor, the first and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes, and the weight are connected to the input stage. ,
前記第 2の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量と前 記第 3の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との和で ある第 1 の角速度静電容量と、 A first capacitance which is a sum of a capacitance generated between the second angular velocity detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the third angular velocity detection electrode and the weight. Angular velocity capacitance,
前記第 1 の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量と前 記第 4の角速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との和で ある第 2の角速度静電容量との差を演算して出力する第 1のコント口一 ルュニッ 卜と、 第 1 のセンサの第 1及び第 2の加速度検出用電極と、 錘体とが入力段 に接続され、 A second capacitance which is a sum of a capacitance generated between the first angular velocity detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the fourth angular velocity detection electrode and the weight. A first control unit for calculating and outputting a difference from the angular velocity capacitance; The first and second acceleration detecting electrodes of the first sensor and the weight are connected to the input stage,
前記第 2の加速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量と、 前記第 1 の加速度検出用電極と前記錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との差 を演算して出力する第 2のコントロールユニッ トと、 The difference between the capacitance generated between the second acceleration detection electrode and the weight and the capacitance generated between the first acceleration detection electrode and the weight is calculated and output. A second control unit
第 2のセンサの第 2及び第 3の角速度検出用電極と、 第 1及び第 4の 角速度検出用電極と、 錘体とが入力段に接続され、 The second and third angular velocity detecting electrodes of the second sensor, the first and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes, and the weight are connected to the input stage,
前記第 2のセンサの第 2の角速度検出用電極と前記第 2のセンサの錘 体との間に生ずる静電容量と前記第 2のセンサの第 3の角速度検出用電 極と前記第 2のセンサの錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との和である第 3 の角速度静電容量と、 The capacitance generated between the second angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor and the weight of the second sensor, the third angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor, and the second A third angular velocity capacitance, which is the sum of the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
前記第 2のセンサの第 1の角速度検出用電極と前記第 2のセンサの錘 体との間に生ずる静電容量と前記第 2のセンサの第 4の角速度検出用電 極と前記第 2のセンサの錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との和である第 4 の角速度静電容量との差を演算して出力する第 3のコン トロールュニッ 卜と、 The capacitance generated between the first angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor and the weight of the second sensor, the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode of the second sensor, and the second A third control unit that calculates and outputs a difference from a fourth angular velocity capacitance, which is a sum of the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
第 2のセンサの第 1及び第 2の加速度検出用電極と、 錘体とが入力段 に接続され、 The first and second acceleration detecting electrodes of the second sensor and the weight are connected to the input stage,
前記第 2のセンサの第 2の加速度検出用電極と前記第 2のセンサの錘 体との間に生ずる静電容量と、 前記第 2のセンサの第 1 の加速度検出用 電極と前記第 2のセンサの錘体との間に生ずる静電容量との差を演算し て出力する第 4のコン トロールュニッ 卜と、 A capacitance generated between a second acceleration detecting electrode of the second sensor and a weight of the second sensor; and a first acceleration detecting electrode of the second sensor and the second acceleration detecting electrode. A fourth control unit that calculates and outputs the difference between the capacitance generated between the sensor and the weight, and
前記第 1 のコン トロールュニッ トの演算出力信号の所定の低域周波数 帯の信号を通過せしめる第 1のローパスフィル夕と、 A first low-pass filter that allows a signal of a predetermined low frequency band of the operation output signal of the first control unit to pass therethrough;
前記第 3のコントロールュニッ トの演算出力信号の所定の低域周波数 帯の信号を通過せしめる第 2のローパスフィル夕と、 前記第 1の口一パスフィル夕の出力信号と、 前記第 2の口一パスフィ ル夕の出力信号との差を演算して出力する第 1の減算器と、 A second low-pass filter for passing a signal of a predetermined low frequency band of the operation output signal of the third control unit; A first subtractor that calculates and outputs a difference between the output signal of the first mouth-to-pass filter and the output signal of the second mouth-to-pass filter;
前記第 1 のコントロールュニッ 卜の演算出力信号と、 前記第 3のコン トロールユニッ トの演算出力信号との和を演算して出力する第 1 の加算 器と、 A first adder for calculating and outputting the sum of the operation output signal of the first control unit and the operation output signal of the third control unit;
前記第 2のコントロールュニッ 卜の演算出力信号と、 前記第 4のコン トロールユニッ トの演算出力信号との差を演算して出力する第 2の減算 器と、 A second subtractor that calculates and outputs a difference between a calculation output signal of the second control unit and a calculation output signal of the fourth control unit;
前記第 2のコントロールュニッ トの演算出力信号と前記第 4のコント ロールユニッ トの演算出力信号との和を演算して出力する第 2の加算器 と、 A second adder that calculates and outputs a sum of a calculation output signal of the second control unit and a calculation output signal of the fourth control unit;
前記第 1 の減算器の出力段に接続され、 入力信号の緩衝増幅を行う第 1 の緩衝増幅器と、 A first buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the first subtractor and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal;
前記第 1 の加算器の出力段に接続され、 入力信号の緩衝増幅を行う第 2の緩衝増幅器と、 A second buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the first adder and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal;
前記第 2の減算器の出力段に接続され、 入力信号の緩衝増幅を行う第 3の緩衝増幅器と、 A third buffer amplifier connected to an output stage of the second subtractor and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal;
前記第 2の加算器の出力段に接続され、 入力信号の緩衝増幅を行う第 4の緩衝増幅器と、 を具備してなる演算装置を設けた移動体基礎情報用 マルチセンサが提供される。 And a fourth buffer amplifier connected to the output stage of the second adder and configured to perform buffer amplification of an input signal.
第 3の発明の形態によれば、 対向する平面側に電極が配設された 2つ の絶縁基板の間に、 半導体部材からなる錘体が、 外部から作用する力に 応じて、 前記電極との間隔が変化するように設けられてなる加速度セン サにおいて、 According to the third aspect of the present invention, a weight body made of a semiconductor member is provided between two insulating substrates having electrodes disposed on opposing flat surfaces in accordance with a force applied from the outside. In the acceleration sensor provided so that the interval of
前記錘体を貫通し、 端面が前記 2枚の絶縁基板に接合された複数の支 持柱を設けてなるものが提供される。 かかる構成においては、 2つの絶縁基板の間に、 複数の支持柱を設け ることで、 従来に比して 2つの絶縁基板に接合される部材の面積を増す ようにして、 製造後における 2つの絶縁基板の歪みが抑圧されるように したものである。 There is provided a structure provided with a plurality of support pillars penetrating the weight body and having end faces joined to the two insulating substrates. In such a configuration, by providing a plurality of support pillars between the two insulating substrates, the area of the member joined to the two insulating substrates is increased as compared with the conventional case, so that the two The distortion of the insulating substrate is suppressed.
より好ましい実施形態として、 錘体には、 複数の支持柱の数に対応し た複数の貫通孔が穿設され、 複数の支持柱は、 これら複数の貫通孔に遊 貫せしめられてなるものが提供される。 図面の簡単な説明 As a more preferred embodiment, the weight body is provided with a plurality of through holes corresponding to the number of the plurality of support columns, and the plurality of support columns are made to pass through the plurality of through holes. Provided. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
図 1 は、 本発明の実施の形態における移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサ の構成と車両への取り付け状態を平面的に示す平面図である。 FIG. 1 is a plan view schematically showing a configuration of a multi-sensor for basic information on a moving object and an attached state to a vehicle according to an embodiment of the present invention.
図 2は、 移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサを構成する g - ωセンサの構 成例を示す分解状態の全体斜視図である。 FIG. 2 is an overall perspective view of a disassembled state showing a configuration example of a g-ω sensor configuring a multi-sensor for mobile object basic information.
図 3は、 枠体とその内側に配設される綞体の平面図である。 FIG. 3 is a plan view of a frame and a body disposed inside the frame.
図 4は、 図 3の A— A線断面図である。 FIG. 4 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.
図 5は、 g - ωセンサ単体での加速度の検出原理を説明する説明図で ある。 FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the principle of detecting acceleration by the g-ω sensor alone.
図 6は、 g - ωセンサ単体での角速度の検出原理を説明する説明図で ある。 FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the principle of detecting the angular velocity by the g-ω sensor alone.
図 7は、 g - t センサ単体での角加速度の検出原理を説明する説明図 である。 FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the principle of detecting angular acceleration by the g-t sensor alone.
図 8は、 本発明の実施の形態における移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサ による加速度の検出原理を説明する説明図であって、 図 8 ( A ) は、 車 両の前後方向に沿う加速度が作用した場合を、 図 8 ( B ) は、 車両の横 方向に沿う加速度が作用した場合を、 それぞれ説明する説明図である。 図 9は、 本発明の実施の形態における移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサ による角速度の検出原理を説明する説明図である。 FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the principle of detecting acceleration by the moving object basic information multi-sensor according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 (A) shows that the acceleration along the longitudinal direction of the vehicle acts. FIG. 8 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where an acceleration is applied along the lateral direction of the vehicle. FIG. 9 shows a multi-sensor for basic information of a moving object according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a principle of detecting an angular velocity according to FIG.
図 1 0は、 本発明の実施の形態における移動体基礎.情報用マルチセン サによる角加速度の検出原理を説明する説明図である。 FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram explaining the principle of detecting angular acceleration by the moving object basic / information multi-sensor according to the embodiment of the present invention.
図 1 1 は、 C P Uによる加速度、 角速度及び角加速度の検出の手順を 示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure of detecting acceleration, angular velocity and angular acceleration by CPU.
図 1 2は、 演算装置の構成例と共に第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサとの 接続例を示す構成図である。 FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration example of the arithmetic unit and a connection example with the first and second g-ω sensors.
図 1 3は、 演算装置の構成例と共に第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサとの 他の接続例を示す構成図である。 FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram showing another configuration example of the arithmetic and logic units together with the first and second g-ω sensors.
図 1 4は、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサの取り付け例を示す模式図で あって、 図 1 4 ( A ) は、 第 1 の取り付け例を示す模式図、 図 1 4 ( B ) は、 第 2の取り付け例を示す模式図、 図 1 4 ( C ) は、 第 3の取 り付け例を示す模式図である。 FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of mounting the first and second g-ω sensors, and FIG. 14 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first mounting example, and FIG. 14 (B). Is a schematic diagram showing a second mounting example, and FIG. 14 (C) is a schematic diagram showing a third mounting example.
図 1 5は、 本発明の実施の形態における加速度センサの第 1 の構成例 における第 2層部分の平面図である。 FIG. 15 is a plan view of a second layer portion in the first configuration example of the acceleration sensor according to the embodiment of the present invention.
図 1 6は、 図 1 5に示された第 1 の構成例の加速度センサを図 1 5の A— A線で切断した際の縦断面図である。 FIG. 16 is a longitudinal sectional view of the acceleration sensor according to the first configuration example shown in FIG. 15 taken along the line AA in FIG.
図 1 7は、 第 2の構成例の加速度センサの第 2層部分の平面図である < 図 1 8は、 第 3の構成例の加速度センサの第 2層部分の平面図である, 図 1 9は、 第 4の構成例の加速度センサの第 2層部分の平面図である < 図 2 0は、 第 5の構成例の加速度センサの第 2層部分の平面図である- 図 2 1は、 第 6の構成例の加速度センサの第 2層部分の平面図である, 図 2 2は、 従来の加速度センサの第 2層部分の平面図である。 FIG. 17 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor of the second configuration example. FIG. 18 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor of the third configuration example. 9 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor according to the fourth configuration example. <FIG. 20 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor according to the fifth configuration example. FIG. 22 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the acceleration sensor according to the sixth configuration example. FIG. 22 is a plan view of a second layer portion of the conventional acceleration sensor.
図 2 3は、 従来の加速度センサを図 2 2の B— B線で切断した際の縦 断面図である。 発明を実施するための最良の形態 FIG. 23 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the conventional acceleration sensor taken along a line BB in FIG. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
本発明をより詳細に説述するために、 添付の図面に従ってこれを説明 する。 The present invention will be described in more detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
なお、 以下に説明する部材、 配置等は本発明を限定するものではなく 本発明の趣旨の範囲内で種々改変することができるものである。 The members, arrangement, and the like described below do not limit the present invention, but can be variously modified within the scope of the present invention.
最初に、 図 1の平面図を参照しつつ、 この発明の実施の形態における 移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサの構成について説明する。 First, the configuration of the multi-sensor for basic information on moving objects according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the plan view of FIG.
この移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサ Sは、 例えば、 車両 Mの略中央の 適宜な位置に設けられて、 その検出出力がェアバック装置等の動作制御 に用いられるものである。 The multi-sensor S for mobile object basic information is provided, for example, at an appropriate position substantially at the center of the vehicle M, and its detection output is used for operation control of an airbag device or the like.
移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサ sは、 基本的に同一の構成を有してな る 2つのセンサ、 すなわち、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 を 具備し、 これら第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 を構成する第 1 のガラス基板 1 Α等 (詳細は後述) のいわゆる板状部材の平面部分が、 鉛直方向 (図 1 において紙面表裏方向) に沿うように、 かつ、 後述する ト一シヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B . 1 3 B ) と直交する方向にお いて、 それぞれの g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 の中心を通る仮想的な直線 (図 1 の点線参照) が互いに直交するようにして、 平板状に形成された 部材である基板 5 2上に適宜な間隔を隔てて設けられてなるものである (図 1参照) 。 The moving object basic information multi-sensor s includes two sensors having basically the same configuration, that is, first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51. And the first glass substrate 1 ガ ラ ス constituting the second g—ω sensors 50, 51, etc. (details will be described later). Along the center of each g-ω sensor 50, 51 in the direction perpendicular to the transfer chambers 12A, 13A (12B, 13B) described later. The virtual straight lines (see dotted lines in FIG. 1) are provided at appropriate intervals on the substrate 52, which is a plate-shaped member, so that the virtual straight lines (see the dotted lines in FIG. See).
換言すれば、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 の基板 5 2上の 配置は、 基板 5 2上の中心を通る直線 (図 1 において一点鎖線で表され た直線) ィに対して、 第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0の後述する トーシヨ ンバ — 1 2 Α, 1 3 Αと直交する方向において、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0の 中心を通る仮想的な直線 (図 1 の点線参照) がなす角度 Θ ,と、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1の後述する トーシヨンバ一 1 2 Β, 1 3 Βと直交する 方向において、 第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 1の中心を通る仮想的な直線 (図 1の点線参照) がなす角度 Θ 2とが共に、 4 5度に設定されたものとな つている。 ' なお、 図 1 において、 Uは、 車両 Μの前方方向の加速度を、 U ' は、 車両 Μの後方方向の加速度を、 Vは、 車両 Μの左方向の加速度を、 V ' は、 車両 Μの右方向の加速度を、 それぞれ意味するものである。 In other words, the arrangement of the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 on the substrate 52 is a straight line passing through the center on the substrate 52 (a straight line represented by a chain line in FIG. 1). In contrast, a virtual straight line passing through the center of the first g—ω sensor 50 in a direction orthogonal to the later-described torsion bar — 1 2 Α, 13 の of the first g—ω sensor 50 (See the dotted line in Fig. 1) and the angle 直交, which is perpendicular to the second g-ω sensor 51 1 In the direction, the second g - and the angle theta 2 which forms virtual straight line (see dotted lines in FIG. 1) is both, are One Do to that set to 4 5 degrees through ω sensor 5 1 of the center. 'In Fig. 1, U is the acceleration in the forward direction of vehicle U, U' is the acceleration in the backward direction of vehicle Μ, V is the acceleration in the left direction of vehicle 方向, and V 'is the acceleration of vehicle Μ. Means the acceleration in the right direction.
また、 ωは、 車両 Μに生ずるロール(r o l 1 )、 すなわち、 車両 Mの前後 方向に沿い、 かつ、 基板 5 2の中央を通るような仮想的な軸を想定した 場合、 この軸を中心にした回動を生ずるような作用であって、 換言すれ ば、 角速度を意味する。 Further, ω is a roll (rol 1) generated in the vehicle Μ, that is, assuming a virtual axis along the front-rear direction of the vehicle M and passing through the center of the substrate 52, the center of this axis is This is an action that causes a rotational motion, in other words, an angular velocity.
さ らに、 ω ' は、 車両 Μに生ずるョー(y aw)、 すなわち、 車両 Mの回 転により生ずるような作用であり、 換言すれば、 角加速度を意味する。 図 2乃至図 4には、 第 1及び第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 の具体的 構成例が示されており、 以下、 同図を参照しつつその構成等について説 明する。 Further, ω ′ is a force (y aw) generated in the vehicle Μ, that is, an effect generated by the rotation of the vehicle M, in other words, means an angular acceleration. 2 to 4 show specific configuration examples of the first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51. The configuration and the like will be described below with reference to FIG.
なお、 第 1 の g — ωセンサ 5 0 と第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 1は、 基本的 に同一の構成を有してなるものであるので、 以下の構成の説明において は、 第 1の g — ωセンサ 5 0の構成要素の符号の後に、 括弧書きで第 2 の g — ωセンサ 5 1 の対応する構成要素の符号を示し、 第 1 の g — ωセ ンサ 5 0の構成の説明を以て第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 1 の構成の説明に代 えることとする。 Since the first g—ω sensor 50 and the second g—ω sensor 51 have basically the same configuration, the first configuration will be described in the following description. g — the sign of the component of the ω sensor 50, followed by the parentheses to indicate the sign of the corresponding component of the second g — ω sensor 51; Thus, the description of the configuration of the second g — ω sensor 51 is replaced with the following.
なお、 説明の都合上、 図 2に示されたように、 第 1及び第 2の g — ω センサ 5 0 , 5 1 の横軸方向 (同図において紙面左右方向) を X軸とし. 第 1及び第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1の厚み方向 (同図において紙面 上下方向) を Ζ軸とし、 この X Ζ軸に直交する方向の軸を Υ軸と定義す る。 まず、 この第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0 ( 5 1 ) の全体構成を概括的に述 ベれば、 この第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0 ( 5 1 ) は、 2つの絶縁基板とし ての第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 Α, 2 A ( I B , 2 B ) の間に、 シリ コンからなる錘体 3 A ( 3 B) 、 枠体 4 A ( 4 B ) 等が挟持されるよう に設けられて、 いわば 3層構造を形成してなるものである。 そして、 こ の第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0 ( 5 1 ) は、 一般に静電容量型と称され、 検 出出力として静電容量が得られるようになっているものである。 For the sake of explanation, as shown in FIG. 2, the horizontal axis of the first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51 (in the figure, the horizontal direction in the drawing) is the X axis. And the thickness direction of the second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 (the vertical direction in the drawing) is defined as the Ζ axis, and the axis perpendicular to the X 方向 axis is defined as the Υ axis. First, the overall configuration of the first g—ω sensor 50 (51) is generally described. The first g—ω sensor 50 (51) has two insulating substrates. Between the first and second glass substrates 1 Α, 2 A (IB, 2 B), a weight body 3 A (3 B) made of silicon, a frame body 4 A (4 B), etc. It has a three-layer structure. The first g-ω sensor 50 (51) is generally called an electrostatic capacitance type, and an electrostatic capacitance is obtained as a detection output.
以下、 具体的にその構成を説明すれば、 まず、 枠体 4 A ( 4 B ) は、 シリ コンを用いて、 その X Y平面に現れる形状がいわゆる枠状に形成さ れてなるもので、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 A, 2 A ( I B , 2 B ) の周縁部分に接合されるようになっている (図 4参照) 。 そして、 この 枠体 4 A ( 4 B ) の内側には、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) 力 Y軸方向において やや一方の側部へ偏って配設されると共に、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) と枠体 4 A ( 4 B ) との間に、 第 1乃至第 6の電極接続柱 5 A〜 1 0 A ( 5 B〜 1 0 B ) が X軸方向において適宜な間隔を隔てて配設されている (図 2 及び図 3参照) 。 The structure will be specifically described below. First, the frame 4A (4B) is formed by using silicon to form a shape that appears on the XY plane in a so-called frame shape. The first and second glass substrates 1A and 2A (IB, 2B) are joined to the peripheral portions (see FIG. 4). Inside the frame 4 A (4 B), the weight 3 A (3 B) is disposed slightly biased to one side in the Y-axis direction, and the weight 3 A (3 B) ) And the frame 4A (4B), first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10A (5B to 10B) are arranged at appropriate intervals in the X-axis direction. (See Figures 2 and 3).
錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) は、 全体がシリ コンを用いて平板状に形成されてな るもので、 後述するようにその中央に設けられた支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 B) 及びトーシヨ ンバ一 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B) を介して第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 A, 2 A ( I B , 2 B ) の間において、 ト一 シヨ ンバー 1 2 A , 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B ) を中心にした回動等 (詳 細は後述) が可能に設けられたものとなっている。 この錘体 3 A ( 3 B) は、 Z軸方向の厚みが、 先の枠体 4 A ( 4 B ) に比してやや小さく 設定されたものとなっており、 第 1 及び第 2のガラス基板 1 A, 2 A ( I B , 2 B ) との間に、 間隙が生ずるようになつている (図 4参照) , この錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の中央には、 支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 B ) 及びトー シヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 Β ) が錘体 3 A ( 3 Β ) に対 して一体に設けられている。 The weight 3A (3B) is formed entirely in a flat plate using silicon. As will be described later, a support column 11A (11B) and a toshiyo provided at the center thereof are provided. Between the first and second glass substrates 1A, 2A (IB, 2B) via the members 12A, 13A (12B, 13B). A, 13 A (12 B, 13 B) is provided so as to be able to rotate around the center (12 B, 13 B) (details will be described later). The weight 3A (3B) has a thickness in the Z-axis direction set to be slightly smaller than that of the frame 4A (4B), and the first and second glass substrates 1 A, 2 A (IB, 2 B) and a gap is formed between them (see FIG. 4). At the center of the weight 3 A (3 B), there is a support column 11 A ( 1 1 B) and toe The chambers 12A and 13A (12B, 13Β) are provided integrally with the weight 3A (3Β).
すなわち、 錘体 3 Α ( 3 Β ) の中央には、 支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 Β ) 及 びトーシヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B, 1 3 B ) を設けるために、 適宜な大きさの貫通孔 1 4 A ( 1 4 B ) が穿設されており、 この貫通孔 1 4 A ( 1 4 B ) の略中央に、 柱状に形成された支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 B) が設けられている (図 2乃至図 4参照) 。 この支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 B ) は、 Z軸方向の厚みが、 先の枠体 4 A ( 4 B ) のそれと同一に設定 されたものとなっており、 Z軸方向の両端面は、 それぞれ第 1及び第 2 のガラス基板 1 A, 2 A ( I B , 2 B ) に接合されるようになっている (図 4参照) 。 In other words, in order to provide a support column 11A (11 1) and torsion bars 12A, 13A (12B, 13B) in the center of the weight 3Α (3Β), A through hole 14 A (14 B) of an appropriate size is formed, and a support pillar 11 A (1 B) formed in a column shape is provided substantially at the center of the through hole 14 A (14 B). 1 B) is provided (see FIGS. 2 to 4). The support column 11A (11B) has the same thickness in the Z-axis direction as that of the frame 4A (4B), and both end surfaces in the Z-axis direction The first and second glass substrates 1A and 2A (IB, 2B) are bonded to each other (see FIG. 4).
そして、 支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 B ) の対向する一組の側面部分から ト一 ショ ンバ一 1 2 A. 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B ) が延設されて、 その端部 が錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) に一体となるように接合されている (図 2及び図 3 参照) 。 すなわち、 この発明の実施の形態においては、 支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 B ) の 4つの側面の内、 Y軸方向で対向する一組の側面の中央か ら ト一シヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B . 1 3 B) が Y軸方向に延設 されている (図 3参照) 。 A torsion bar 12A.13A (12B, 13B) is extended from a pair of opposing side portions of the support column 11A (11B), and the end thereof is provided. The part is joined so as to be integral with the weight 3 A (3 B) (see FIGS. 2 and 3). That is, in the embodiment of the present invention, among the four side surfaces of the support pillar 11A (11B), the tonsion chambers 12A, 12A, and 12A, from the center of a pair of side surfaces facing each other in the Y-axis direction. 13A (12B.13B) extends in the Y-axis direction (see Fig. 3).
卜一シヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B) は、 その X Z平面 における断面形状が、 矩形状に形成されてなるもので、 より具体的には. このトーシヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B ) は、 Z軸方向の 長さに比して X軸方向が細幅に設定されたものとなっており、 また、 Z 軸方向は、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B) の Z軸方向の厚みと同一となっている (図 4参照) 。 The torsion bar 12A, 13A (12B, 13B) has a rectangular cross section in the XZ plane. More specifically, the torsion bar 1 2A and 13A (12B and 13B) have a narrower width in the X-axis direction than their length in the Z-axis direction. The thickness of the weight 3A (3B) is the same as the thickness in the Z-axis direction (see Fig. 4).
そして、 このトーシヨ ンバ一 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B, 1 3 B ) の両 端部は、 貫通孔 1 4 A ( 1 4 B ) の内壁に接合されるようにして錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) と一体に形成されたものとなっている (図 2参照) 。 Both ends of the torsion chambers 12A and 13A (12B, 13B) are connected to the inner wall of the through hole 14A (14B) so that the weight 3 It is formed integrally with A (3B) (see Fig. 2).
このような構造によって、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) は、 ト一シヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B) を中心に後述するように回動可能とされ, また、 Z軸方向に変位可能となっている。 With such a structure, the weight 3A (3B) is rotatable about the torsion bars 12A and 13A (12B and 13B) as described later. It can be displaced in the Z-axis direction.
錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の Y軸方向の一方の側部と枠体 4 A ( 4 B ) との間 には、 シリコンからなる第 1 乃至第 6の電極接続柱 5 A〜 1 0 A ( 5 B 〜 1 0 B) が設けられている (図 2及び図 3参照) 。 Between one side of the weight body 3A (3B) in the Y-axis direction and the frame body 4A (4B), the first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10A made of silicon are provided. (5B to 10B) (see Figs. 2 and 3).
この第 1 乃至第 6の電極接続柱 5 A〜 1 0 A ( 5 B〜 1 0 B) は、 柱 状に形成されてなるもので、 その Z軸方向の厚みは、 先の枠体 4 A ( 4 B ) のそれと略同一に設定されたものとなっている。 The first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10A (5B to 10B) are formed in a columnar shape, and the thickness in the Z-axis direction is It is set almost the same as that of (4B).
第 1 乃至第 6の電極接続柱 5 A〜 1 0 A ( 5 B〜 1 0 B) は、 その Z 軸方向の端面が、 後述する第 1 乃至第 6 の引き出し片 2 0 a〜 2 0 f ( 2 1 a〜 2 1 f ) と接合される位置であって、 かつ、 端面の略中央に 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 A, 2 A ( I B , 2 B ) に設けられたそれ ぞれ対応する第 1乃至第 6の配線接続孔 1 5 a〜 1 5 f ( 1 6 a〜 1 6 f ) が位置するように配設されている。 The first to sixth electrode connection pillars 5A to 10A (5B to 10B) have end faces in the Z-axis direction, the first to sixth lead pieces 20a to 20f described later. (21a to 21f), and provided on the first and second glass substrates 1A, 2A (IB, 2B) at substantially the center of the end face. The corresponding first to sixth wiring connection holes 15 a to 15 f (16 a to 16 f) are arranged.
一方、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 A, 2 A ( I B , 2 B ) は、 その XY平面における外形、 寸法が枠体 4 A ( 4 B) のそれと略同一に形成 されており、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) と対向する面には、 次述するように電極 が形成されたものとなっている。 On the other hand, the first and second glass substrates 1A and 2A (IB, 2B) have substantially the same outer shape and dimensions in the XY plane as those of the frame 4A (4B). Electrodes are formed on the surface facing the body 3A (3B) as described below.
すなわち、 第 1のガラス基板 1 A ( 1 B ) においては、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B) と対向する面側に、 導電性部材 (例えば I T〇等) を用いて外形形 状が矩形状に形成されてなる第 1の加速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B ) が略中央に配され、 その両側に、 第 1 の加速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B) と適宜な間隙を隔てて、 導電性部材 (例えば I T〇等) を用いて矩 形状に形成されてなる第 1及び第 2の角速度検出用電極 1 8 A, 1 9 A ( 1 8 B , 1 9 Β ) がそれぞれ配設されている (図 2及び図 4参照) 。 なお、 これら電極の形成には、 例えば、 真空蒸着等の公知 · 周知の製造 技術が適用できる。 That is, in the first glass substrate 1A (1B), the outer shape is made rectangular by using a conductive member (for example, IT〇) on the surface facing the weight 3A (3B). The formed first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) is disposed substantially at the center, and a suitable gap is provided on both sides thereof with the first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B). The first and second angular velocity detecting electrodes 18 A, 19 A formed in a rectangular shape using a conductive member (for example, IT〇). (18 B, 19 Β) are provided (see Fig. 2 and Fig. 4). For forming these electrodes, for example, known and well-known manufacturing techniques such as vacuum deposition can be applied.
第 1 の加速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B ) は、 第 1及び第 2の角速度 検出用電極 1 8 A, 1 9 A ( 1 8 B, 1 9 B ) に比して、 その大きさが 大となっており、 その中央部分は、 少なく とも先の支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 B ) の端面との接触が回避されるように矩形状に切り欠かれたものとな つている (図 2参照) 。 The first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) is larger than the first and second angular velocity detecting electrodes 18 A, 19 A (18 B, 19 B). The central part is cut out in a rectangular shape so as to avoid contact with at least the end face of the support column 11A (11B). (See Figure 2).
そして、 第 1 の加速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B ) と、 この第 1 の加 速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B ) と対向する錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の部位と でいわゆる平行板コンデンサ C 1が、 また、 第 1 の角速度検出用電極 1 8 A ( 1 8 Bと、 この第 1 の角加速度検出用電極 1 8 A ( 1 8 B ) と対 向する錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の部位とでいわゆる平行板コンデンサ C laが、 さらに、 第 2の角速度検出用電極 1 9 A ( 1 9 B ) と、 この第 2の角速 度検出用電極 1 9 A ( 1 9 B ) と対向する錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の部位とで いわゆる平行板コンデンサ C lbが、 それぞれ形成されるようになってい る。 The first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) and the portion of the weight 3 A (3 B) facing the first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) The so-called parallel plate capacitor C 1 also has a first angular velocity detecting electrode 18 A (18 B) and a weight body opposed to the first angular acceleration detecting electrode 18 A (18 B). A so-called parallel plate capacitor C la at the portion of 3 A (3 B) further includes a second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 A (19 B) and a second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 A A so-called parallel plate capacitor C lb is formed between (19 B) and the opposing portion of the weight 3A (3B).
また、 第 1 のガラス基板 1 A ( I B) には、 先の第 1 乃至第 6の電極 接続柱 5 A〜 1 0 A ( 5 B〜 1 0 B) と対向する位置に、 それぞれ第 1 乃至第 6の配線接続孔 1 5 a〜 1 5 f ( 1 6 a〜 1 6 f ) が穿設されて いる (図 2参照) 。 The first glass substrate 1A (IB) has first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10A (5B to 10B) at positions facing the first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to 10B, respectively. Sixth wiring connection holes 15a to 15f (16a to 16f) are formed (see FIG. 2).
そして、 第 2の配線接続孔 1 5 b ( 1 6 b ) 側に位置する先の第 1 の 角速度検出電極 1 8 A ( 1 8 B ) の端部からは、 導電性部材からなる第 2の引き出し片 2 0 b ( 2 1 b ) が、 第 2の配線接続孔 1 5 b ( 1 6 b ) の開口部分の際まで形成されている (図 2参照) 。 Then, from the end of the first angular velocity detecting electrode 18 A (18 B) located on the side of the second wiring connection hole 15 b (16 b), a second conductive material The lead piece 20 b (21 b) is formed up to the opening of the second wiring connection hole 15 b (16 b) (see FIG. 2).
また、 第 4の配線接続孔 1 5 d ( 1 6 d ) 側に位置する先の第 1の加 速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B ) の縁からは、 導電性部材からなる第 4 の引き出し片 2 0 d ( 2 I d) 力 第 4の配線接続孔 1 5 d ( 1 6 d ) の開口部分の際まで形成されている (図 2参照) 。 Also, the first wiring member located at the fourth wiring connection hole 15 d (16 d) side is used. From the edge of the speed detection electrode 17 A (17 B), a fourth lead piece 20 d (2 I d) made of a conductive material is applied.Fourth wiring connection hole 15 d (16 d) It is formed up to the part of the opening (see Fig. 2).
さらに、 第 6の配線接続孔 1 5 f ( 1 6 f ) 側に位置する先の第 2の 角速度検出用電極 1 9 A ( 1 9 B ) の端部からは、 導電性部材からなる 第 6の引き出し片 2 0 f ( 2 1 f ) が、 第 6の配線接続孔 1 5 f ( 1 6 f ) の開口部分の際まで形成されている (図 2参照) 。 Further, from the end of the second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 A (19 B) located on the side of the sixth wiring connection hole 15 f (16 f), a sixth member made of a conductive member is formed. The lead piece 20 f (21 f) is formed up to the opening of the sixth wiring connection hole 15 f (16 f) (see FIG. 2).
またさらに、 第 1 のガラス基板 1 A ( 1 B ) には、 先の支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 B ) の端面が接合される位置に、 第 7の配線接続孔 1 5 g ( 1 6 g) が穿設されている。 Further, the first glass substrate 1A (1B) has a seventh wiring connection hole 15g (16) at a position where the end surface of the support pillar 11A (11B) is joined. g) is drilled.
これら、 第 1 乃至第 7 の配線接続孔 1 5 a〜 1 5 g ( 1 6 a〜 1 6 g) には、 金属材が充填されて、 それぞれ第 1乃至第 6の電極接続柱 5 A〜 1 0 A ( 5 B〜 1 0 B) 並びに支持柱 1 1 A ( 1 1 B ) との間に、 いわゆるォ一ミックコンタク トが生ずるようにしてある。 そして、 金属 材充填の際には、 図示されないリード線が、 その一部が外部へ出るよう に第 1 乃至第 7の配線接続孔 1 5 a〜 1 5 g ( 1 6 a〜 1 6 g ) へ埋め 込まれるようになつており、 このリード線によって、 第 1の加速度検出 用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B ) 並びに第 1及び第 2の角速度検出用電極 1 8 A, 1 9 A ( 1 8 B, 1 9 B ) は外部の回路との接続が可能とされている。 また、 後述する第 2のガラス基板 2 A ( 2 B ) の第 2の加速度検出用電 極 2 2 A ( 2 2 B ) 並びに第 3及び第 4の角速度検出用電極 2 3 A, 2 4 A ( 2 3 B , 2 4 B ) も、 同様に外部の回路との接続が可能となって いる。 These first to seventh wiring connection holes 15a to 15g (16a to 16g) are filled with a metal material, and the first to sixth electrode connection columns 5A to A so-called omic contact is generated between 10 A (5B to 10B) and the support column 11A (11B). When the metal material is filled, the first to seventh wiring connection holes 15a to 15g (16a to 16g) are inserted so that a lead wire (not shown) is partially exposed. The first lead electrode 17A (17B) and the first and second angular velocity detection electrodes 18A, 19A (1 8B, 19B) can be connected to an external circuit. Also, a second acceleration detecting electrode 22A (22B), and third and fourth angular velocity detecting electrodes 23A and 24A of a second glass substrate 2A (2B) described later. (23B, 24B) can also be connected to external circuits.
第 2のガラス基板 2 A ( 2 B ) においては、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) と対向 する面に、 先の第 1の加速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B ) 並びに第 1及 び第 2の角速度検出用電極 1 8 A, 1 9 A ( 1 8 B , 1 9 B ) と同一形 状寸法を有してなる導電性部材 (例えば I TO等) からなる第 2の加速 度検出用電極 2 2 A ( 2 2 B) 並びに第 3及び第 4の角速度検出用電極In the second glass substrate 2A (2B), the first acceleration detecting electrodes 17A (17B) and the first and second acceleration detecting electrodes 17A (17B) are provided on the surface facing the weight 3A (3B). Same shape as second angular velocity detection electrode 18 A, 19 A (18 B, 19 B) Electrodes 22 A (22 B) and third and fourth electrodes for angular velocity detection made of a conductive member (for example, ITO, etc.) having the same dimension.
2 3 A, 2 4 A ( 2 3 B, 2 4 B ) が配設されている (図 2参照) 。 な お、 これら電極の形成には、 例えば、 真空蒸着等の公知 · 周知の製造技 術を適用することができる。 23A and 24A (23B and 24B) are provided (see Fig. 2). In forming these electrodes, for example, a known or well-known manufacturing technique such as vacuum evaporation can be applied.
そして、 第 2の加速度検出用電極 2 2 A ( 2 2 B ) と、 この第 2の加 速度検出用電極 2 2 A ( 2 2 B ) と対向する錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の部位と でいわゆる平行板コンデンサ C 2が、 また、 第 3の角速度検出用電極 2 Then, the second acceleration detecting electrode 22A (22B) and the portion of the weight 3A (3B) facing the second acceleration detecting electrode 22A (22B) The so-called parallel plate capacitor C 2 and the third angular velocity detecting electrode 2
3 A ( 2 3 B ) と、 この第 3の角速度検出用電極 2 3 A ( 2 3 B ) と対 向する錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の部位とでいわゆる平行板コンデンサ C 2aが、 さらに, 第 4の角速度検出用電極 2 4 A ( 2 4 B ) と、 この第 4の角速 度検出用電極 2 4 A ( 2 4 B ) と対向する錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の部位とで いわゆる平行板コンデンサ C 2bが、 それぞれ形成されるようになってい る。 A so-called parallel plate capacitor C 2a is formed by 3 A (23 B) and the portion of the weight 3 A (3 B) opposed to the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23 A (23 B). , A fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 A (24 B), and a portion of the weight 3 A (3 B) facing the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 A (24 B). Thus, a so-called parallel plate capacitor C 2b is formed.
また、 第 1 の電極接続柱 5 A ( 5 B ) 側に位置する第 3の角速度検出 用電極 2 3 A ( 2 3 B ) の端部からは、 導電性部材からなる第 1 の引き 出し片 2 0 a ( 2 1 a ) 力 、 第 1 の電極接続柱 5 A ( 5 B ) の端面に対 向する位置まで形成されている (図 2参照) 。 In addition, a first lead-out piece made of a conductive member is connected to an end of the third angular velocity detection electrode 23 A (23 B) located on the first electrode connection column 5 A (5 B) side. The 20a (21a) force is formed up to a position facing the end face of the first electrode connection column 5A (5B) (see FIG. 2).
また、 第 3の電極接続柱 7 A ( 7 B) 側に位置する第 2の加速度検出 用電極 2 2 A ( 2 2 B ) の縁からは、 導電性部材からなる第 3の引き出 し片 2 0 c ( 2 1 c ) が、 第 3の電極接続柱 7 A ( 7 B ) の端面に対向 する位置まで形成されている (図 2参照) 。 In addition, a third lead-out piece made of a conductive member extends from the edge of the second acceleration detecting electrode 22A (22B) located on the third electrode connecting column 7A (7B) side. 20 c (21 c) is formed up to a position facing the end face of the third electrode connection pillar 7 A (7 B) (see FIG. 2).
さらに、 第 5の電極接続柱 9 A ( 9 B ) 側に位置する第 4の角速度検 出用電極 2 4 A ( 2 4 B) の端部からは、 導電性部材からなる第 5の引 き出し片 2 0 e ( 2 1 e ) が、 第 5の電極接続柱 9 A ( 9 B ) の端面に 対向する位置まで形成されている (図 2参照) 。 ここで、 上述した構成における第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1の図 1 に示された配置について、 再度説明すれば、 まず、 基板 5 2に 対する第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1のそれぞれの取り付けは, 基本的に同一である。 Furthermore, a fifth pulling electrode made of a conductive member is connected to an end of the fourth electrode for detecting angular velocity 24 A (24 B) located on the side of the fifth electrode connecting pole 9 A (9 B). The extension piece 20 e (21 e) is formed up to a position facing the end face of the fifth electrode connection pillar 9 A (9 B) (see FIG. 2). Here, the arrangement of the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 in the above-described configuration shown in FIG. 1 will be described again. First, the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 with respect to the substrate 52 will be described. g—The mounting of the ω sensors 50 and 51 is basically the same.
すなわち、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0. 5 1 は、 それぞれの卜 ーシヨ ンバ一 1 2 Α, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B) が基板 5 2に対して垂 直となるように基板 5 2に取着されると共に、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0 の中心を通り、 かつ、 卜ーシヨ ンバー 1 2 Α. 1 3 Αに直交する仮想的 な線と、 第 2の g— ojセンサ 5 1 の中心を通り、 かつ、 ト一シヨ ンバ一 1 2 B , 1 3 Bに直交する仮想的な線とが直交するように基板 5 2に取 着されたものとなっている。 In other words, the first and second g-ω sensors 50.5 1 are such that each of the torsions 12 1, 13A (12B, 13B) is perpendicular to the substrate 52. And a virtual line that passes through the center of the first g-ω sensor 50 and is orthogonal to the torsion bar 12 2. (2) A sensor attached to the substrate 52 so that a virtual line passing through the center of the o-j sensor 51 and orthogonal to the transistors 12B and 13B is orthogonal to the sensor. Has become.
上述した構成を有してなる第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 は. いわゆる公知 · 周知のマイクロマシニング製造技術により製造するのが 好適である。 The first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 having the above-described configuration are preferably manufactured by a so-called well-known and well-known micromachining manufacturing technique.
次に、 かかる構成における第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0 または、 第 2の g 一 ωセンサ 5 1 を単独で用いた場合の動作について説明する。 Next, the operation when the first g-ω sensor 50 or the second g-ω sensor 51 in this configuration is used alone will be described.
最初に、 加速度が作用した場合について説明する。 First, the case where acceleration is applied will be described.
加速度の検出にあたっては、 例えば、 図 5に示されたように、 第 4の 配線接続孔 1 5 d ( 1 6 d ) に設けられたリード線 (図示せず) を介し て第 1の加速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B ) を、 また、 第 3の配線接続 孔 1 5 c ( 1 6 c ) に設けられたリード線 (図示せず) を介して第 2の 加速度検出用電極 2 2 A ( 2 2 B) を、 それぞれ外部に設けられた演算 装置 3 0へ接続する一方、 第 7の配線接続孔 1 5 g ( 1 6 g) に設けら れたリード線 (図示せず) を介して、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B) をアースに接続 する。 これにより、 演算装置 3 0へは、 平行板コンデンサ C 1の静電容 量と、 平行板コンデンサ C 2の静電容量とが、 それぞれ入力されること となる。 In detecting the acceleration, for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the first acceleration detection is performed through a lead wire (not shown) provided in the fourth wiring connection hole 15d (16d). The second electrode 17A (17B) is connected to the second acceleration detecting electrode 2 via a lead wire (not shown) provided in the third wiring connection hole 15c (16c). 2 A (22 B) is connected to an arithmetic unit 30 provided outside, respectively, while a lead wire (not shown) provided in a seventh wiring connection hole 15 g (16 g) is provided. Connect the weight 3 A (3 B) to the ground via. As a result, the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C1 and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C2 are input to the arithmetic unit 30. Becomes
ここで、 演算装置 3 0は、 平行板コンデンサ C I, C 2の各々の静電容 量を基に、 後述するような演算を行い、 その演算結果に応じた電圧信号 を出力するようになっているもので、 このような機能を有する演算装置 3 0は、 例えば、 いわゆる C P Uを用いることで簡易に実現されるもの で、 公知 , 周知のものである。 Here, the arithmetic unit 30 performs an operation as described later based on the capacitance of each of the parallel plate capacitors CI and C2, and outputs a voltage signal according to the operation result. The arithmetic unit 30 having such a function is easily realized by using, for example, a so-called CPU, and is a publicly-known or well-known one.
加速度 gが作用する前の平衡状態において、 第 1 のガラス基板 1 A ( I B ) 上の第 1 の加速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B ) と錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) との距離及び、 第 2のガラス基板 2 A ( 2 B ) 上の第 2の加速度検 出用電極 2 2 A ( 2 2 B ) と錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) との距離は共に等しく、 これを d とする (図 5参照) 。 In the equilibrium state before the acceleration g is applied, the distance between the first acceleration detecting electrode 17 A (17 B) on the first glass substrate 1 A (IB) and the weight 3 A (3 B) The distance between the second acceleration detecting electrode 22A (22B) and the weight 3A (3B) on the second glass substrate 2A (2B) is equal to (See Figure 5).
また、 図 5に示されたように、 加速度 gが第 1 のガラス基板 1 A ( 1 B ) から第 2のガラス基板 2 A ( 2 B ) へ向かう方向で作用したと仮定 し、 その際、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) が先の平衡状態の位置から変位する距離 を δ とすると (図 5の点線部分参照) 、 このいわば変位量 όは、 下記す る式 1 により求められる。 Also, as shown in FIG. 5, it is assumed that the acceleration g acts in the direction from the first glass substrate 1A (1B) to the second glass substrate 2A (2B). Assuming that the distance that the weight 3A (3B) displaces from the position of the equilibrium state is δ (see the dotted line in FIG. 5), the so-called displacement 量 can be obtained by the following equation 1.
δ = F ■ I 3 / ( 2 4 Ε · I ) = m · g · 1 3/ ( 2 E ' b ' d " · · · (式 1 ) δ = F ■ I 3 / ( 2 4 Ε · I) = m · g · 1 3 / (2 E 'b' d "· · · ( Equation 1)
ここで、 1 は、 ト一シヨ ンバ一 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B . 1 3 B ) の 長さ (図 3参照) であり、 Eは、 ヤング率であり、 I は、 トーシヨ ンバ - 1 2 A . 1 3 A ( 1 2 B, 1 3 B ) の断面 2次モーメントであり、 b は、 トーシヨンバ一 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B ) の幅であり (図 4参照) 、 dは、 卜一シヨ ンバー 1 2 A , 1 3 A ( 1 2 B, 1 3 B ) の 高さ ( Z軸方向の厚み) であり (図 4参照) 、 Fは、 重さ mの物体に加 速度 gが作用した際に、 当該物体にかかる力である。 なお、 この演算式 は、 いわゆる 「はり」 の撓みを求める際に用いられる公知 · 周知のもの である。 Here, 1 is the length of the receivers 12A and 13A (12B.13B) (see Fig. 3), E is Young's modulus, and I is Toshiyo. 13A (12B, 13B) is the second moment of area, and b is the width of the torsion bar 1A, 13A (12B, 13B). Yes (see Fig. 4), d is the height (thickness in the Z-axis direction) of the total chambers 12A, 13A (12B, 13B) (see Fig. 4), and F is The force applied to an object weighing m when the acceleration g acts on the object. In addition, this arithmetic expression is a well-known and well-known formula used when calculating the deflection of a so-called “beam”. It is.
上述の式からは、 変位量 (5は、 加速度 gに比例するものであるという ことができる。 From the above equation, it can be said that the displacement (5 is proportional to the acceleration g).
一方、 いわゆる平行板コンデンサ C 1, C 2に加速度 gが作用したこと により、 いわゆる電極間隔、 すなわち、 第 1 の加速度検出用電極 1 7 A ( 1 7 B) と錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の間隔、 第 2の加速度検出用電極 2 2 A ( 2 2 B) と錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の間隔が変化した場合の静電容量は、 下 記する基本式に基づいて求められる。 On the other hand, the acceleration g acts on the so-called parallel plate capacitors C1 and C2, so-called electrode interval, that is, the first acceleration detecting electrode 17A (17B) and the weight 3A (3B) And the capacitance when the distance between the second acceleration detecting electrode 22A (22B) and the weight 3A (3B) is changed can be obtained based on the following basic formula.
C g = C„ { d „ / ( d - (5 ) } または C g = C ,, { d 。 / ( d „ + (5 ) } として求められる。 C g = C „{d„ / (d-(5))} or C g = C ,, {d ./ (d „+ (5)}.
さらに、 この 2つの式は、 先の <5を表す式 1 を用いて次のように書き 表すことができる。 Furthermore, these two expressions can be written as follows using the expression 1 representing <5.
C g= C„ { 1 土 m' l 3 ' gZ ( 2 E · b · d 3 · d„ ) } · · · (式 2 ) ここで、 C。は、 加速度 g作用前の初期静電容量で、 平行板コンデン サ C I, C 2いずれも等しいものとする。 C g = C „{1 soil m 'l 3 ' gZ (2 E · b · d 3 · d„)} · · · (Equation 2) where C. Is the initial capacitance before the action of acceleration g, and it is assumed that both parallel plate capacitors CI and C 2 are equal.
より具体的には、 例えば、 図 5 に示されたように加速度 gが作用した 場合において、 平行板コンデンサ C 1におけるいわゆる電極間隔は、 小 さくなつているので、 静電容量を C lgとすれば、 次の式 3のように表さ れる。 More specifically, for example, when the acceleration g acts as shown in FIG. 5, the so-called electrode spacing in the parallel plate capacitor C1 is small, so that the capacitance is set to C lg. For example, it is expressed as the following equation 3.
C lg= C„ { d„/ ( d - δ ) } = C„ { 1 + m · 1 3 · g / ( 2 E · b · d 3 · d。) } · · · (式 3 ) C lg = C "{d" / (d - δ)} = C "{(. 2 E · b · d 3 · d) 1 + m · 1 3 · g /} · · · ( Equation 3)
また、 図 5の場合、 平行板コンデンサ C 2においては、 静電容量を C 2 gとすれば、 いわゆる電極間隔が大きくなつているので、 C2gは次の式 In addition, in the case of Fig. 5, in the parallel plate capacitor C2, if the capacitance is C2g, the so-called electrode spacing is large, so C2g is given by the following equation.
4のように表される。 Expressed as 4.
C2g= C。 { d„/ ( d。 + (5 ) } = C„ { 1 -m- 1 3 · g/ ( 2 E · b■ d 3 · d。) } · · · (式 4 ) この C lg及び C 2gの式は、 初期容量 C„に対して、 いわゆる電極間隔 の変化に対応する容量変化分 {m' l 3 ' g Z ( 2 E ' b ' d 3 ' d。) } C。 が、 いわゆる電極間隔が小さくなつた場合には加算され、 いわゆる電極 間隔が大きくなつた場合には、 減算されるものとなっている。 C2g = C. {D "/ (d. + (5)} = C" {1 -m- 1 3 · g / (2 E · b ■ d 3 · d.)} · · · ( Equation 4) The formulas of C lg and C 2g are as follows: The initial capacitance C „, the change in capacitance corresponding to the change in the so-called electrode spacing {m ′ l 3 ′ g Z (2E′b′d 3 ′ d.)} C. is added when the so-called electrode spacing is reduced, and is subtracted when the so-called electrode spacing is increased.
そして、 容量変化分を表す上記文字式から明らかなように、 容量変化 分は、 加速度 gに比例するものとなっている。 また、 先の変位量 δの式 で述べたように、 変位量 δは、 加速度 gに比例する関係となっているた め、 容量変化分は、 変位量 ό と比例関係にあるということもできる。 And, as is clear from the above-mentioned character expression representing the capacitance change, the capacitance change is proportional to the acceleration g. Also, as described in the equation for the amount of displacement δ, since the amount of displacement δ is proportional to the acceleration g, it can be said that the change in capacitance is proportional to the amount of displacement ό. .
したがって、 容量変化分を知ることで、 加速度 gの大きさを知ること ができることとなる。 Therefore, the magnitude of the acceleration g can be known by knowing the capacitance change.
実際には、 演算装置 3 0においては、 それぞれのコンデンサ C 1, C 2 の容量変化分の差 (C2g— C lg) が算出される。 In practice, the arithmetic unit 30 calculates the difference (C2g-Clg) between the capacitance changes of the capacitors C1 and C2.
図 5 に示されたように、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) が第 1 のガラス基板 1 A ( 1 B ) 側へ変位した場合には、 C lg〉 C 2gとなるため、 ( C 2g— C 1 g) の演算値は、 負の値となる。 As shown in FIG. 5, when the weight 3A (3B) is displaced toward the first glass substrate 1A (1B), Clg> C2g, so that (C2g— The calculated value of C 1 g) is a negative value.
これに対して、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) が第 2のガラス基板 2 A ( 2 B ) 側 へ変位した場合には、 C lg< C 2gとなるため、 ( C 2g— C lg) の演算値 は、 正の値となる。 On the other hand, when the weight 3A (3B) is displaced toward the second glass substrate 2A (2B), Clg <C2g, so that (C2g-Clg) The calculated value is a positive value.
したがって、 変位量 <5の絶対値が同じであっても、 その符号により加 速度 gの方向を知ることができることとなる。 Therefore, even if the absolute value of the displacement <5 is the same, the direction of the acceleration g can be known from the sign.
演算装置 3 0は、 (C 2g - C lg) の演算値に対応した大きさの電圧信 号 Voutが出力されるようになっている。 すなわち、 この電圧信号 V out は、 (C2g— C lg) の符号をも考慮したものとなっており、 (C 2g— C lg) の絶対値が同一であっても、 ( C2g— C lg) の演算値が正の符号の 場合と、 負の符号の場合とでは、 異なる電圧値が予め設定されており、 出力されるようになっている。 それ故、 電圧信号 Voutは、 加速度 gの大きさと方向を示すものとな る。 The arithmetic unit 30 outputs a voltage signal Vout having a magnitude corresponding to the arithmetic value of (C 2g -C lg). That is, this voltage signal V out also takes into account the sign of (C2g-C lg). Even if the absolute value of (C 2g-C lg) is the same, (C2g-C lg) Different voltage values are set in advance when the operation value of is a positive sign and when the operation value is a negative sign, and are output. Therefore, the voltage signal Vout indicates the magnitude and direction of the acceleration g.
次に、 角加速度の検出について図 6を参照しつつ説明する。 Next, detection of angular acceleration will be described with reference to FIG.
最初に、 図 6に示されたように、 ト一シヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B) を中心に、 第 1 の角速度検出電極 1 8 A ( 1 8 B ) と錘 体 3 A ( 3 B) との間隔及び第 4の角速度検出用電極 2 4 A ( 2 4 B ) と錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) との間隔が狭くなり、 第 2の角速度検出用電極 1 9 A ( 1 9 B ) と錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) との間隔及び第 3の角速度検出用電極 2 3 A ( 2 3 B ) と錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) との間隔が拡がるような角加速度 wZdt) が作用したと仮定し、 この場合の錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の水平 状態からの傾き角を αとする。 First, as shown in Fig. 6, the first angular velocity detecting electrode 18A (18B) is centered on the receiver 12A, 13A (12B, 13B). And the distance between the weight 3A (3B) and the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24A (24B) and the weight 3A (3B) are reduced, and the second angular velocity The distance between the electrode 19A (19B) and the weight 3A (3B) and the distance between the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23A (23B) and the weight 3A (3B) Assuming that an expanding angular acceleration wZdt) acts, let α be the tilt angle of the weight 3A (3B) from the horizontal state in this case.
これにより、 平行板コンデンサ C la, C 2bの静電容量は増加する一方, 平行板コンデンサ C lb, C 2aの静電容量は減少することとなる。 As a result, the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitors C la and C 2b increases, while the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitors C lb and C 2a decreases.
したがって、 この平行板コンデンサ C la, C lb, C 2a, C 2bの静電容 量の変化量を知ることで、 角加速度を知ることができる。 Therefore, the angular acceleration can be obtained by knowing the amount of change in the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitors C la, C lb, C 2a, and C 2b.
以下、 角加速度の作用による トーシヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B ) を中心にした錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の回動と静電容量との関係につ いて定量的に説明する。 The relationship between the rotation of the weight 3A (3B) around the torsion bar 12A, 13A (12B, 13B) due to the action of angular acceleration and the capacitance is described below. It will be explained quantitatively.
まず、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) に角加速度 (dc Zdt) が作用したことによ り、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) に生ずる トルク Tは、 次式 5により求められる。 First, the torque T generated in the weight 3A (3B) due to the angular acceleration (dc Zdt) acting on the weight 3A (3B) is obtained by the following equation (5).
T = J (dco/dt) =m ( L - D 2 ) (dco/dt) / 1 2 · · · (式 5 ) T = J (dco / dt) = m (L-D 2 ) (dco / dt) / 1 2
ここで、 J は、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の慣性モーメントであり、 ωは、 角 速度であり、 mは、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の重さであり、 Lは、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の横の長さ (図 3参照) であり、 Dは、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の縦 の長さ (図 3参照) である。 一方、 ト一シヨ ンバ一 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B ) を中心にね じり角 αだけ錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) が回動したことにより、 トーシヨ ンバーWhere J is the moment of inertia of the weight 3 A (3 B), ω is the angular velocity, m is the weight of the weight 3 A (3 B), and L is the weight 3A (3B) is the horizontal length (see Fig. 3), and D is the vertical length of the weight 3A (3B) (see Fig. 3). On the other hand, the weight 3A (3B) is rotated around the torsion angle α around the toys bar 12 A, 13 A (12 B, 13 B), and the torsion bar
1 2 A , 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 Β ) に生ずるねじりモーメン ト M tは、 次式 6のように表される。 The torsional moment Mt generated at 12 A, 13 A (12 B, 13 Β) is expressed by the following equation (6).
M t= G - Ι ρ· α / 1 = G - b - d ( b 2 + d " ) / ( 1 2 - 1 ) · · · (式 6 ) M t = G-Ι ρα / 1 = G-b-d (b 2 + d ") / (12-1) (Equation 6)
ここで、 Gは、 ト一シヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B ) の せん断係数であり、 I Pは、 トーシヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , Here, G is the shear modulus of the toy bar 12 A, 13 A (12 B, 13 B), and IP is the torsion bar 12 A, 13 A (12 B,
1 3 B ) の断面 2次極モーメン トであり、 bは、 トーシヨ ンバ一 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B ) の幅であり、 dは、 ト一シヨ ンバ一 1 2 A,13 B) is the cross-sectional secondary moment of moment, b is the width of the torsion bar 12 A, 13 A (12 B, 13 B), and d is the width of the torsion bar 1 2 A,
1 3 A ( 1 2 B, 1 3 B ) の高さ ( Z軸方向の厚み) であり、 1 は、 ト ーシヨ ンバ一 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 B ) の長さである (図 4参 照) 。 The height of 13 A (12 B, 13 B) (thickness in the Z-axis direction), where 1 is the length of the torsion bar 12 A, 13 A (12 B, 13 B). (See Figure 4).
この式をねじり角ひの式に書き換えると次の式 7のように表される。 a =M t- l / ( G - I ) · · · (式 7 ) If this equation is rewritten as a torsion angle equation, it is expressed as the following equation 7. a = M t- l / (G-I)
そして、 ねじりモーメン ト M tと先のトルク Tとが釣り合うところで、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) が静止し、 ねじり角 αが定まることを考慮して、 この αの式の M tを先の Τの式で置き換えて、 書き改めると次式 8を得るこ とができる。 Then, considering that the torsion moment Mt and the preceding torque T are balanced, the weight 3A (3B) is stationary, and the torsion angle α is determined. By replacing with the formula of Τ and rewriting, the following formula 8 can be obtained.
α = J · 1 (άω /dt) / ( G · I p) = m · 1 ( L - D 2 ) ( d ω / d t) / { G · b · d ( b 2 + d 2) } · · · (式 8 ) α = J · 1 (άω / dt) / (G · I p) = m · 1 (L-D 2 ) (d ω / dt) / {G · b · d (b 2 + d 2 )} · · · · (Equation 8)
一方、 平行板コンデンサ C la, C lb, C 2a. C 2bのいわゆる電極間隔 の変化による各々の静電容量 C ω ' は、 下記する基本式 9により求める ことができる。 On the other hand, the respective capacitances C ω ′ of the parallel plate capacitors C la, C lb, C 2a. C 2b due to the change in the electrode spacing can be obtained by the following basic equation 9.
C ω ' = C { d„ / ( d n - r · tan a ) } または、 C w ' = C。 { d 0 Z ( d。 + r · tan a ) } · · · (式 9 ) ここで、 rは、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の横の長さ Lの 1 / 2を意味するも のである。 C ω '= C {d „/ (d n -r · tan a)} or C w' = C. {d 0 Z (d. + R · tan a)} · · · (Equation 9) Here, r means 1 of the lateral length L of the cone 3 A (3 B).
さらに、 これらの式は、 中括弧の中の分数を計算して近似式に置き換 えることで次の式 1 0のように整理することができる。 Furthermore, these expressions can be rearranged as shown in the following expression 10 by calculating the fraction in curly braces and replacing it with an approximate expression.
C w ' ^ C n l i r 'tana / d ,,) · · · (式 1 0 ) C w '^ C n l i r' tana / d ,,) (Equation 10)
そして、 ねじり角 αが充分小さいため、 tana αが成立するとして、 先に示された aについての式 8 を用いて整理すると次式 1 1 のように表 される。 Then, assuming that tana α is satisfied because the torsion angle α is sufficiently small, rearranging using Equation 8 for a shown earlier gives Equation 11 as follows.
C ω ' = C„ [ 1 士 {m ' l ( L - D 2 ) (άω /dt) } / { G · b · d ( b 2 + d 2 ) d。 } ] · · · (式 1 1 ) C ω '= C „[1 person {m' l (L-D 2 ) (άω / dt)} / {Gb d (b 2 + d 2 ) d.}] )
この式は、 初期容量 C。に対して、 いわゆる電極間隔の変化に対応す る容量変化分 [ {m' l ( L - - D ' ) (dco/dt) } Z { G · b · d ( b 2 + d 2) d。 } ] C ,,が、 いわゆる電極間隔が小さくなつた場合には加算 され、 いわゆる電極間隔が大きくなつた場合には、 減算されるものとな つている。 This equation is the initial capacity C. Respect, capacity variation that corresponds to the change in the so-called electrode interval [{m 'l (L - - D') (dco / dt)} Z {G · b · d (b 2 + d 2) d. }] C ,, is added when the so-called electrode spacing is reduced, and is subtracted when the so-called electrode spacing is increased.
そして、 この容量変化分を表す上記文字式から明らかなように、 容量 変化分は、 角加速度 (d Zdt) に比例するものとなっている。 また、 先のねじり角ひの式で述べたように、 ねじり角ひは、 角加速度 (dco /d t) に比例する関係となっているため、 容量変化分は、 ねじり角 aと比 例関係にあるという こともできる。 And, as is clear from the above-mentioned character expression representing the capacitance change, the capacitance change is proportional to the angular acceleration (d Zdt). Also, as described in the equation for the torsion angle, the torsion angle is proportional to the angular acceleration (dco / dt), so the capacitance change is proportional to the torsion angle a. It can be said that there is.
したがって、 容量変化分を知ることで、 角加速度の大きさを知ること ができることとなる。 Therefore, by knowing the amount of change in capacitance, the magnitude of angular acceleration can be known.
実際には、 図 6に示されたように、 第 1 の角速度検出用電極 1 8 A ( 1 8 B ) と第 4の角速度検出用電極 2 4 A ( 2 4 B ) とを接続して演 算装置 3 0の一つの入力端子に接続し、 第 2の角速度検出用電極 1 9 A ( 1 9 B) と第 3の角速度検出用電極 2 3 A ( 2 3 B) とを接続して演 算装置 3 0の他の入力端子に接続し、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B) は、 アースに接 " 。 Actually, as shown in Fig. 6, the first angular velocity detecting electrode 18A (18B) is connected to the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24A (24B). Connected to one input terminal of the arithmetic unit 30, and connected to the second angular velocity detecting electrode 19A (19B) and the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23A (23B). Connect the other input terminal of the arithmetic unit 30 and connect the weight 3 A (3 B) to the ground.
換言すれば、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B) の回動により、 容量変化が同じとなる 平行板コンデンサ同士を並列接続した状態とする。 すなわち、 平行板コ ンデンサ C laと平行板コンデンサ C 2bとが並列接続された状態とされ、 これら 2つのコンデンサの総容量が演算装置 3 0 に入力されることとな る。 In other words, by rotating the weight 3A (3B), parallel plate capacitors having the same capacitance change are connected in parallel. That is, the parallel plate capacitor C la and the parallel plate capacitor C 2b are connected in parallel, and the total capacitance of these two capacitors is input to the arithmetic unit 30.
また、 平行板コンデンサ C lbと平行板コンデンサ C 2aとが並列接続さ れた状態とされ、 これら 2つのコンデンザの総容量が演算装置 3 0に入 力されることとなる。 Further, the parallel plate capacitor C lb and the parallel plate capacitor C 2a are connected in parallel, and the total capacity of these two capacitors is input to the arithmetic unit 30.
ここで、 角加速度が作用した際における平行板コンデンサ C laの静電 容量と平行板コンデンサ C 2bの静電容量の和を C とし、 平行板コ ンデンサ C lbの静電容量と平行板コンデンサ C 2aの静電容量の和を C 2 ノ とすると、 演算装置 3 0においては、 ( C ノ — C , ) が演算さ れるようになっている。 Here, C is the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C la and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2b when the angular acceleration is applied, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C lb and the parallel plate capacitor C Assuming that the sum of the capacitances of 2a is C 2 , the arithmetic unit 30 calculates (C no — C,).
すなわち、 先の加速度の場合と同様に、 容量変化分の差が算出される こととなる。 That is, similarly to the case of the acceleration, the difference of the capacitance change is calculated.
この場合、 各平行板コンデンサ C 1 a , C lb, C 2a, C 2bにおける静 電容量の変化分の絶対値が同一であると仮定し、 これを A CW' と表す とすると、 図 6において点線で示されたように錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) が回動 した場合、 ( C 2 (/ - C ,„ ) = (— 2 Δ C ,ノ — 2 Δ Cノ ) = - 4 A C,/ と、 負の値となる。 In this case, assuming that the absolute value of the change in the capacitance of each parallel plate capacitor C 1 a, C lb, C 2a, C 2b is the same, and this is expressed as AC W ′, then Fig. 6 When the weight 3 A (3 B) rotates as shown by the dotted line, (C 2 ( /-C, „) = (— 2 Δ C, no — 2 Δ C no) =-4 AC, / And a negative value.
なお、 ここで、 .ノ は、 先の式 1 1 を基に、 Δ Cノ = { m · 1 ( L 2 - D 2) (dco/dt) } / { G · b · d ( b 2 + d 2) d。} C。と表さ れるものである。 Here, .no is based on Equation 11 above, and ΔCno = {m · 1 (L 2 -D 2 ) (dco / dt)} / {G · b · d (b 2 + d 2) d. } C. It is expressed as
これに対して、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) が、 図 6に示されたとは逆方向に回 動するような角加速度が作用した場合には、 上述したのとは逆に、 平行 板コンデンサ C l b, C 2 aの静電容量が増加し、 平行板コンデンサ C l a , C 2 bの静電容量は減少することとなる。 したがって、 ( C 2 l - C , ω ' ) の演算値は、 4 Δ C となり、 先の場合とは符号が異なること となる。 On the other hand, the weight 3 A (3 B) rotates in the opposite direction to that shown in FIG. When an angular acceleration that moves is applied, the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitors C lb and C 2 a increases, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitors C la and C 2 b is increased. The capacity will be reduced. Therefore, the calculated value of ( C2l -C, ω ') is 4ΔC, and the sign is different from the previous case.
したがって、 ( C 2 ω ' - C , ) の演算値の大きさによって、 角加 速度の大きさを知ることができ、 また、 符号によって角加速度の方向を 知ることができる。 Therefore, the magnitude of the angular acceleration can be known from the magnitude of the calculated value of (C 2 ω'- C,), and the direction of the angular acceleration can be known from the sign.
演算装置 3 0 においては、 予め定められた ( C 2 ,ノ - C ,„ ' ) の大 きさ及び符号と、 電圧信号 V o uし ' の大きさとの対応関係に応じて、 ( C ,„, ' - C , , ) の演算結果に応じて、 電圧信号 V o mノ が出力さ れるようになっている。 In the arithmetic unit 30, (C, „) is determined according to the correspondence between the predetermined magnitude and sign of (C 2 , -−C,„ ′) and the magnitude of the voltage signal V ou ′. , '-C,,), the voltage signal V om is output in accordance with the result of the operation.
次に、 角速度の検出について説明する。 Next, detection of the angular velocity will be described.
まず、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0 を例に採って説明する力 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 の場合にも同様である。 図 7 には、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0が図 1 に示されたように配設された状態において、 それを更にモデル 化したものが示されており、 以下、 同図を参照しつつ説明する。 First, the force described using the first g-ω sensor 50 as an example is the same as in the case of the second g-ω sensor 51. FIG. 7 shows a model obtained by further modeling the first g-ω sensor 50 in a state where it is arranged as shown in FIG. 1. Referring to FIG. I will explain it.
最初に、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0が基板 5 2に取着された状態におい て、 仮想的な回転軸 (図 7の二点鎖線) を中心に、 例えば、 図 7の仮想 的な回転軸の手前側 (回転軸の矢印のある端部と反対側) から軸を見て いわゆる時計回り方向に角速度 ωが作用したとする。 First, in a state where the first g—ω sensor 50 is attached to the substrate 52, the virtual g axis is centered on the virtual rotation axis (the two-dot chain line in FIG. 7). Assume that the angular velocity ω acts in a so-called clockwise direction when the axis is viewed from the near side of the axis of rotation (the side opposite to the end with the arrow of the axis of rotation).
錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の中心点を Oとして、 この中心点〇と仮想的な回転 軸との距離を Rとする。 また、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) は、 中心点〇から距離 r離れた箇所に重さ mの重心があるものとモデル化できると仮定する。 かかる前提の下、 角速度 ωが作用したことにより、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) は、 角速度 ωが作用する前のいわば平衡状態における位置 (図 7におい ては点線で表示された位置) から時計回り方向へねじり角度 αだけ回動 したとする (図 7においては実線で表された位置) 。 Let O be the center point of the weight 3 A (3 B), and let R be the distance between this center point 〇 and the virtual rotation axis. Assume that the weight 3 A (3 B) can be modeled as having a center of gravity of weight m at a distance r from the center point 〇. Under this assumption, the angular velocity ω acts, so that the weight 3A (3B) is in a so-called equilibrium state before the angular velocity ω acts (see FIG. 7). From the position indicated by the dotted line) to the clockwise direction by the torsion angle α (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 7).
かかる状態において、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の一方の端の重心において、 すなわち、 図 7において左端の重心においては、 先の仮想的な回転軸に 対して直交する方向であって、 かつ、 その仮想的な回転軸から離間する 方向に遠心力 F ,が作用する (図 7参照) 。 In this state, at the center of gravity of one end of the weight body 3A (3B), that is, at the center of gravity of the left end in FIG. 7, the direction is orthogonal to the virtual rotation axis, and The centrifugal force F acts in a direction away from the virtual rotation axis (see Fig. 7).
また、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の他方の端の重心において、 すなわち、 図 7 において右端の重心においては、 先の仮想的な回転軸に対して直交する 方向であって、 かつ、 その仮想的な回転軸から離間する方向に遠心力 F 2が作用する (図 7参照) 。 Also, at the center of gravity of the other end of the weight 3A (3B), that is, at the center of gravity at the right end in FIG. 7, the direction is orthogonal to the virtual rotation axis and the virtual centrifugal force F 2 acts in a direction away from the rotation axis (see FIG. 7).
これら遠心力 F L F 2は、 それぞれ下記する式 1 2 , 1 3で表すこと ができる。 These centrifugal forces FLF2 can be expressed by the following equations 12 and 13, respectively.
F , = m · ω - ( R + r · s in© ) · · · (式 1 2 ) F, = mω-(R + rsin ©)
Ρ 2 = ΐΉ·ω - (R - r -sin0) · · · (式 1 3 ) Ρ 2 = ωω-(R-r -sin0)
ここで、 mは、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の重さであり、 ωは、 角速度であり . rは、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の横の長さ Lの 1 / 2の長さであり、 Θは、 先 の仮想的な回転軸に平行し、 かつ、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の中心点 0を通る 仮想中心線 (図 7において一点鎖線表示) と錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の横方向 の軸線とのなす角度である (図 7参照) 。 Here, m is the weight of the weight 3 A (3 B), ω is the angular velocity.r is the length of 1/2 of the horizontal length L of the weight 3 A (3 B). Where Θ is a virtual center line (indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 7) and a weight 3 A which are parallel to the virtual rotation axis and pass through the center point 0 of the weight 3 A (3 B). This is the angle made with the horizontal axis of (3B) (see Fig. 7).
このような力が作用することで、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) には次式 1 4 こよ り表されるような回転モ一メント Mが生じる。 When such a force acts, a rotational moment M is generated in the weight 3A (3B) as expressed by the following equation 14.
M = I f , - F ) r = F , - F ) r -cos©= 2 Γ " ·ηι· ω " ·8ί n©cos© - - - (式 1 4 ) M = I f,-F) r = F,-F) r -cos © = 2 Γ "ηη ω" 8ί n © cos ©---(Equation 14)
ここで、 , F 2 ' は、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の横軸方向に対して直 交方向の遠心力 Fい F 2の成分である (図 7参照) 。 Here, and F 2 ′ are the components of the centrifugal force F or F 2 in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis of the weight 3 A (3 B) (see FIG. 7).
一方、 トーシヨ ンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A ( 1 2 B , 1 3 Β ) には、 ねじ りモーメント Mtが生ずるが、 これは、 先の式 6により求められる。 On the other hand, the torsion bars 12 A and 13 A (12 B, 13 Β) A moment Mt is generated, which is obtained by Equation 6 above.
すなわち、 Mt= G ' I p' a Z l = G ' b ' d ( b 2 + d 2 ) / ( 1 2 · 1 ) となる。 In other words, the Mt = G 'I p' a Z l = G 'b' d (b 2 + d 2) / (1 2 · 1).
そして、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) は、 このねじりモーメン ト Mtと先の回転 モーメント Mとが釣り合ったところで静止し、 角速度が作用する前の位 置を基準として角度 αだけ回動することとなる。 Then, the weight 3A (3B) stops when the torsional moment Mt and the preceding rotational moment M are balanced, and rotates by the angle α with respect to the position before the angular velocity acts. Become.
したがって、 式 1 4 =式 6 としてねじり角 αの式に書き改めると、 次 の式 1 5を得ることができる。 なお、 この際、 式 1 4における角度 Θは. 角速度が作用する前の平衡状態において、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の横軸 (図 3において長さ Lをなす軸方向) と、 仮想中心線 (図 7 において一点鎖 線表示) とのなす角度であり、 先に図 1 を参照しつつ説明した第 1及び 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 の配置により、 Θ = 4 5 ° とされ、 式 1 4における sin©cos®は、 sin®cos© = 1 / 2 となる。 Therefore, the following equation 15 can be obtained by rewriting the equation of torsion angle α as Equation 14 = Equation 6. In this case, the angle に お け る in Equation 14 is expressed as follows. In the equilibrium state before the angular velocity acts, the horizontal axis of the weight 3 A (3 B) (the axial direction forming the length L in FIG. 3) and the virtual center This is the angle formed by the first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51 described above with reference to FIG. ° and sin © cos® in equation 14 is sin®cos © = 1/2.
α = 1 2 l -m- r - W 2 / { G -b-d ( b 2 + d 2) } · · · (式 1 5 ) したがって、 ねじり角 αは、 角速度と比例関係にあると言うことがで さる。 α = 1 2 l -m- r -W 2 / {G -bd (b 2 + d 2 )} · (Equation 15) Therefore, it can be said that the torsion angle α is proportional to the angular velocity. In monkey.
一方、 角速度が作用したことに起因する錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の回動によ る平行板コンデンサ C , C lb, C 2a, C 2bの容量 C eoは、 先の式 1 0 を用いて求めることができる。 On the other hand, the capacitance C eo of the parallel plate capacitors C, C lb, C 2a, and C 2b due to the rotation of the weight 3 A (3 B) caused by the angular velocity is calculated using the above equation (10). You can ask.
そして、 ねじり角 αが充分小さいため、 tana = αが成立するとして、 先に示された aについての式 1 5を用いて整理すると次式 1 6のように 表される。 Then, assuming that tana = α is satisfied because the torsion angle α is sufficiently small, rearranging using the expression 15 for a shown earlier gives the following expression 16.
C ω C。 { ( d„/ ( d。一 r · a; ) } = C„ { 1 土 ( 1 2 m · 1 · r 3 · ω " / (G - b - d ( b 2 + d 2 ) d。) } · · · (式 1 6 ) C ω C. {(d „/ (d. one r · a;)} = C„ {1 soil (12 m · 1 · r 3 · ω "/ (G-b-d (b 2 + d 2 ) d.) } · · · (Equation 16)
この式は、 初期容量 C。に対して、 いわゆる電極間隔の変化に対応す る容量変化分 { ( 1 2 πι· 1 · Γ 3 · ω 2 ) / ( G - b - d ( b 2 + d 2 ) d o ) } C ,,が、 いわゆる電極間隔が小さくなつた場合には加算され、 い わゆる電極間隔が大きくなつた場合には、 減算されるものとなっている c そして、 この容量変化分を表す上記文字式から明らかなように、 容量 変化分は、 角速度 ωに比例するものとなっている。 また、 先のねじり角 αを求める式 1 5で述べたように、 ねじり角 αは、 角速度 ωに比例する 関係となっているため、 容量変化分は、 ねじり角 αと比例関係にあると いう こともできる。 This equation is the initial capacity C. , The capacitance change corresponding to the change in the electrode spacing {(1 2 πι · 1 · Γ 3 · ω 2 ) / (G-b-d (b 2 + d 2 ) d o)} C ,, is added when the electrode spacing is reduced, and is subtracted when the electrode spacing is increased c. As is clear from the above character formula, the change in capacitance is proportional to the angular velocity ω. In addition, as described in Equation 15 for calculating the torsion angle α, the torsion angle α is proportional to the angular velocity ω, so the change in capacitance is proportional to the torsion angle α. You can also.
したがって、 容量変化分を知ることで、 角速度の大きさを知ることが できることとなる。 Therefore, by knowing the amount of change in the capacitance, the magnitude of the angular velocity can be known.
実際には、 先の角加速度の場合と同様に各電極の配線が行われる。 す なわち、 図 6に示されたと同様に、 第 1 の角速度検出電極 1 8 A ( 1 8 B) と第 4の角速度検出用電極 2 4 A ( 2 4 B) とを接続して演算装置 3 0の一つの入力端子に接続し、 第 2の角速度検出用電極 1 9 A ( 1 9 B ) と第 3の角速度検出用電極 2 3 A ( 2 3 B ) とを接続して演算装置 3 0の他の入力端子に接続し、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) は、 アースに接続する < 換言すれば、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の回動により、 容量変化が同じとなる 平行板コンデンサ同士を並列接続した状態とする。 すなわち、 平行板コ ンデンサ C laと平行板コンデンサ C 2bとが並列接続された状態とされ、 これら 2つのコンデンサの総容量が演算装置 3 0に入力されることとな る。 Actually, wiring of each electrode is performed as in the case of the angular acceleration. That is, as shown in FIG. 6, the first angular velocity detecting electrode 18 A (18 B) is connected to the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 A (24 B), and the arithmetic unit is connected. 30 is connected to one input terminal, and the second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 A (19 B) and the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23 A (23 B) are connected. 0 Connect to the other input terminal and connect the weight 3 A (3 B) to the ground <In other words, the rotation of the weight 3 A (3 B) causes the same change in capacitance as the parallel plate The capacitors are connected in parallel. That is, the parallel plate capacitor C la and the parallel plate capacitor C 2b are connected in parallel, and the total capacitance of these two capacitors is input to the arithmetic unit 30.
また、 平行板コンデンサ C lbと平行板コンデンサ C 2aとが並列接続さ れた状態とされ、 これら 2つのコンデンザの総容量が演算装置 3 0に入 力されることとなる。 Further, the parallel plate capacitor C lb and the parallel plate capacitor C 2a are connected in parallel, and the total capacity of these two capacitors is input to the arithmetic unit 30.
ここで、 角速度が作用した際における平行板コンデンサ C laの静電容 量と平行板コンデンサ C 2bの静電容量の和を C , ωとし、 平行板コンデ ンサ C lbの静電容量と平行板コンデンサ C 2aの静電容量の和を C 2 (。と すると、 演算装置 3 0 においては、 ( C 2 ω— C , ω) が演算されるよう になっている。 Where C and ω are the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C la and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2b when the angular velocity acts, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C lb and the parallel plate capacitor The sum of the capacitances of C 2a is C 2 ( Then, in the arithmetic unit 30, (C 2 ω —C, ω ) is calculated.
すなわち、 先の角加速度の場合と同様に、 容量変化分の差が算出され ることとなる。 That is, similarly to the case of the angular acceleration described above, the difference of the capacitance change is calculated.
この場合、 各平行板コンデンサ C 1 a , C lb, C 2a, C 2bにおける静 電容量の変化分の絶対値が同一であると仮定し、 これを A C ωと表すと すると、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) の回動により、 平行板コンデンサ C l a C 2 bの容量が増加し、 平行板コンデンサ C lb C 2aの容量が減少する場合 には、 ( C 一 C , ,) = (一 2 △ C ω— 2 △ C„' ) =— 4 △ C ωと、 負の 値となる。 In this case, assuming that the absolute value of the change in the capacitance of each parallel plate capacitor C 1 a, C lb, C 2a, C 2b is the same, and this is expressed as AC ω , the weight 3 A When the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C la C 2b increases and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C lb C 2a decreases due to the rotation of (3 B), then (C-1 C,) = (1 2 △ C ω — 2 △ C „') = — 4 △ C ω, which is a negative value.
なお、 ここで、 Δ C は、 先の式 1 6 を基に、 △ C ω = { ( 1 2 m - 1 · r 3 · ω 2 ) Ζ ( G · b · d ( b 2 + d 2 ) d „ ) } C„と表されるもので ある。 Here, ΔC is based on Equation 16 above, and ΔC ω = ((1 2 m-1 · r 3 · ω 2 ) Ζ (G · b · d (b 2 + d 2 ) d „)} C„.
これに対して、 錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) 力 平行板コンデンサ C l a C 2b の容量が減少し、 平行板コンデンサ C lb, C 2aの容量が増加するような 方向に角速度が作用した場合には、 上述したのとは逆に、 ( C 2,„— C , の演算値は、 4 Δ C ωとなり、 先の場合とは符号が異なることとな る。 On the other hand, when the angular velocity acts in such a direction that the weight of the parallel plate capacitor C la C 2b decreases and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitors C lb and C 2a increases, On the contrary, the operation value of (C 2 , „− C, becomes 4 ΔC ω , which is different in sign from the previous case.
したがって、 (C ^— c 1 („) の演算値の大きさによって、 角速度の 大きさを知ることができ、 また、 その符号によって角速度の方向を知る ことができる。 Therefore, the magnitude of the angular velocity can be known from the magnitude of the calculated value of (C ^ — c 1 ( „), and the direction of the angular velocity can be known from the sign thereof.
演算装置 3 0 においては、 予め定められた ( C 2 w— C l w) の大きさ 及び符号と、 電圧信号 V ouしの大きさとの対応関係に応じて、 ( C 2 w — C 1 ω) の演算結果に対応した電圧信号 Vouしが出力されるようにな つている。 In the arithmetic unit 30, according to the correspondence between the predetermined magnitude and sign of (C 2 w — C lw ) and the magnitude of the voltage signal V ou, (C 2 w — C 1 ω ) The voltage signal Vou corresponding to the calculation result is output.
次に、 図 1に示されたような構成における加速度、 角速度、 角加速度 の検出について、 図 8乃至図 1 0を参照しつつ説明する。 なお、 図 8乃 至図 1 0においては、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1が図 1 に 示されたように配設された状態において、 特に、 図 7 と同様に錘体 3 A ( 3 B ) をモデル化したものが次述するように実線又は点線により示さ れたものとなっている。 Next, acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration in the configuration shown in Fig. 1 Will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. In FIGS. 8 to 10, when the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 are arranged as shown in FIG. 1, in particular, as in FIG. The model of the weight 3A (3B) is indicated by a solid line or a dotted line as described below.
最初に、 加速度の検出について図 8 ( A) , ( B ) を参照しつつ説明 する。 例えば、 図 8 ( A) に示されたように車両 (図示せず) の前方方 向を実線矢印で示された方向とした場合において、 前方方向と逆方向へ 加速度 (図 8 ( A) において二点鎖線矢印で表示) が作用したとすると. 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 においては、 錘体 3 Α, 3 Βは 共に、 加速度が作用する前の平衡状態における位置 (図 8 ( Α) におい て点線で表された位置) から車両の前方方向、 換言すれば、 加速度が作 用する方向とは逆方向へ同じ変位量だけ変位する こ ととなる (図 8 ( Α) において実線で表された位置) 。 この場合、 何れの錘体 3 Α, 3 Βも、 それぞれの第 1 のガラス基板 1 A, 1 B側へ変位し、 平行板コン デンサ C 1の容量が増加することとなり、 図 8 ( Α) においては、 この ような状態であることを、 +記号によって表している。 First, acceleration detection will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (A) and 8 (B). For example, as shown in Fig. 8 (A), when the forward direction of the vehicle (not shown) is set to the direction shown by the solid line arrow, the acceleration in the opposite direction to the forward direction (in Fig. 8 (A)). In the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51, both the weights 3 3 and 3 に お け る are in the equilibrium state before the acceleration is applied. From the position (the position indicated by the dotted line in Fig. 8 (Α)), the vehicle is displaced by the same amount of displacement in the forward direction of the vehicle, in other words, in the direction opposite to the direction in which the acceleration acts (Fig. 8 (Position indicated by a solid line in (Α)). In this case, both the weights 3 3 and 3Β are displaced toward the first glass substrates 1A and 1B, respectively, and the capacity of the parallel plate capacitor C1 is increased. In, such a state is indicated by a + sign.
一方、 図 8 ( Α) に示された方向とは逆方向に、 加速度が作用した場 合には、 錘体 3 Α, 3 Βの変位は、 図 8 ( Α) に示された状態とは丁度 逆の状態となる。 On the other hand, when acceleration acts in the direction opposite to the direction shown in Fig. 8 (Α), the displacement of the weights 3Α and 3Β differs from the state shown in Fig. 8 ((). Just the opposite situation.
したがって、 第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0又は第 2の g— oセンサ 5 1の いずれかの出力に基づいて演算装置 3 0により、 先に図 5を参照しつつ 述べたようにして出力される電圧信号 V outにより、 加速度の大きさ及 び方向を知ることができることとなる。 Therefore, based on the output of either the first g—ω sensor 50 or the second g—o sensor 51, the arithmetic unit 30 outputs the output as described above with reference to FIG. With the voltage signal Vout, the magnitude and direction of the acceleration can be known.
次に、 図 8 (B) において、 車両 (図示せず) の右方向を実線矢印で 示された方向とした場合において、 右方向とは逆方向、 すなわち左方向 へ加速度 (図 8 (B) において二点鎖線矢印で表示) が作用したとする と、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1の錘体 3 Α, 3 Βは共に、 加速度の作用した方向と反対方向へ同じ変位量だけ変位することとなる, しかし、 この場合は、 先の図 8 ( Α) の場合とは異なり、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0における錘体 3 Aと第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 A, 2 A 相対関係と、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 における錘体 3 Βと第 1及び第 2 のガラス基板 1 Β, 2 Βとの相対関係は同一ではなくなる。 Next, in FIG. 8 (B), when the right direction of the vehicle (not shown) is the direction indicated by the solid arrow, the direction is opposite to the right direction, that is, the left direction. Assuming that an acceleration (indicated by a two-dot chain line arrow in FIG. 8 (B)) acts, the weights 3Α and 3Β of the first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51 both However, in this case, unlike the case shown in Fig. 8 (Α), the weight 3 in the first g-ω sensor 50 is different from the case shown in Fig. 8 (Α). A and the relative relationship between the weight 3 に お け る and the first and second glass substrates 1 Β and 2 に お け る in the second g—ω sensor 51, and the relative relationship between A and the first and second glass substrates 1 A and 2 A. Relationships are no longer identical.
すなわち、 第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0の錘体 3 Αは、 第 1のガラス基板 1 A側へ変位して平行板コンデンサ C 1の容量が増加する (図 8 ( B ) においては、 このような状態であることを、 +記号によって表してあ る) のに対して、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 の錘体 3 Βは、 第 2のガラス 基板 2 Β側へ変位して平行板コ ンデンサ C 1の容量は減少する (図 8 ( Β ) においては、 このような状態であることを一記号によって表して ある) こととなる。 That is, the weight 3 Α of the first g-ω sensor 50 is displaced toward the first glass substrate 1 A, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 1 is increased. This state is indicated by a + sign), whereas the weight 3 of the second g—ω sensor 51 is displaced toward the second glass substrate 2 Β and parallelized. The capacitance of the plate capacitor C1 decreases (in FIG. 8 ((), such a state is represented by one symbol).
したがって、 先に図 5で説明したように、 演算装置 3 0による電圧信 号 Voutを第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , δ 1 について得ることで、 加速度の大きさと方向とを知ることができる。 すなわち、 例えば、 図 8 ( Β ) に示されたような加速度が作用した場合の第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0の出力に基づく演算装置 3 0による電圧信号を VouU' とし、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 の出力に基づく演算装置 3 0による電圧信号を Vout とすると、 電圧信号 VouU ' 力^ 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0の錘体 3 Αが第 1のガラス基板 1 A側へ所定の変位量だけ変位した状態に対応す る予め定められた所定の電圧であって、 電圧信号 VoiH2' が、 第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 1の錘体 3 Βが第 2のガラス基板 2 Β側へ所定の変位量だ け変位した状態に対応する予め定められた所定の電圧であれば、 図 8 (Β ) に示されたような方向に加速度が作用したと判定することができ しかも、 電圧信号 Vout 又は Vout2' の大きさから、 加速度の大きさ を知ることができる。 Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 5, the magnitude and direction of the acceleration can be obtained by obtaining the voltage signal Vout from the arithmetic unit 30 for the first and second g−ω sensors 50 and δ 1. be able to. That is, for example, the voltage signal by the arithmetic unit 30 based on the output of the first g—ω sensor 50 when the acceleration as shown in FIG. 8 (Β) acts is represented by VouU ′, and the second g — Assuming that the voltage signal from the arithmetic unit 30 based on the output of the ω sensor 51 is Vout, the voltage signal VouU 'force ^ first g— the weight 3 Α of the ω sensor 50 is on the first glass substrate 1A side Is a predetermined voltage corresponding to a state of being displaced by a predetermined displacement amount, and a voltage signal VoiH2 ′ is a second g—ω sensor 51 and the weight 3 Β is a second glass substrate. (2) If the voltage is a predetermined voltage corresponding to the state of being displaced to the 変 位 side by a predetermined amount of displacement, it can be determined that acceleration has acted in the direction shown in Fig. 8 (Β). Moreover, the magnitude of the acceleration can be known from the magnitude of the voltage signal Vout or Vout2 '.
一方、 加速度が図 8 (B) に示された場合とは逆に作用した場合には. 図 8 ( B ) に示されたとは逆に、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0の錘体 3 Aは. 第 2のガラス基板 2 Α側へ加速度の大きさに応じて変位する一方、 第 2 の g— ωセンサ 5 1 の錘体 3 Βは、 加速度の大きさに応じて第 1 のガラ ス基板 1 Β側へ変位することとなる。 On the other hand, when the acceleration acts in the opposite direction to that shown in FIG. 8 (B). Contrary to that shown in FIG. 8 (B), the weight 3 of the first g—ω sensor 50 A is displaced toward the second glass substrate 2 基板 according to the magnitude of the acceleration, while the weight 3 of the second g—ω sensor 51 1 is displaced according to the magnitude of the acceleration. It will be displaced to the substrate 1 side.
したがって、 この場合、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0の出力に基づき演算 装置 3 0により得られる電圧信号を VoiH と、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1の出力に基づき演算装置 3 0 により得られる電圧信号を Vout2〃 とす ると、 これらは、 図 8 ( B ) に示された場合と丁度逆の大きさとなる。 すなわち、 VouU〃 =Vout2' となり、 Vout2〃 = V out 1 ' となる。 そ のため、 これら電圧信号 Voutl〃 , VoiH2〃 から加速度の方向が先の場 合とは逆方向で、 同じ大きさであると判定することが可能となる。 Therefore, in this case, the voltage signal obtained by the arithmetic unit 30 based on the output of the first g—ω sensor 50 is obtained by VoiH, and the voltage signal obtained by the arithmetic unit 30 based on the output of the second g—ω sensor 51. Assuming that the voltage signals to be output are Vout2〃, these are just the opposite magnitudes to the case shown in FIG. 8 (B). That is, VouU〃 = Vout2 ′, and Vout2〃 = Vout1 ′. Therefore, it is possible to determine from these voltage signals Voutl〃 and VoiH2〃 that the direction of the acceleration is opposite to that of the previous case and is the same magnitude.
次に、 角速度の検出について図 9 を参照しつつ説明する。 Next, detection of the angular velocity will be described with reference to FIG.
例えば、 図 9において二点鎖線で表された仮想的な回転中心軸を中心 にし、 この回転中心軸が、 回転中心軸の手前側 (矢印のある先端側と反 対側) から見ていわゆる時計回り方向に角速度が作用したとする。 For example, a virtual rotation center axis represented by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 9 is the center, and this rotation center axis is a so-called clock when viewed from the near side of the rotation center axis (the tip side with the arrow and the opposite side). It is assumed that angular velocity acts in the circumferential direction.
かかる場合において、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 の錘体 3 Α, 3 Βは、 角速度が作用する前の平衡状態の位置 (図 9において点 線で示された位置) から、 同図において実線で示されたような位置へ変 位することとなる。 すなわち、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0の錘体 3 Αは、 中心点 0を中心にして、 図 8において左側の部位が第 1 のガラス基板 1 A側へ変位する一方、 中心点 Oより右側の部位は、 第 2のガラス基板 2 A側へ変位することとなる。 また、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1の錘体 3 B は、 中心点〇を中心にして、 図 9において左側の部位が第 2のガラス基 板 2 B側へ変位する一方、 中心点〇より右側の部位は、 第 1のガラス基 板 1 B側へ変位することとなる。 In such a case, the weights 3Α, 3Β of the first and second g—ω sensors 50, 51 are in the equilibrium state before the angular velocity acts (the position indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 9). ), The position shifts to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. That is, while the weight 3 の of the first g—ω sensor 50 is displaced toward the first glass substrate 1 A side with respect to the center point 0 with respect to the center point 0, The right part is displaced toward the second glass substrate 2A. The weight 3 B of the second g—ω sensor 51 is centered on the center point 〇, and the left part in FIG. The portion on the right side of the center point 〇 is displaced toward the first glass substrate 1B while being displaced toward the plate 2B.
その結果、 第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0においては、 平行板コンデンサ C laの静電容量と平行板コンデンサ C 2bの静電容量の和であるじ と、 平行板コンデンサ C lbの静電容量と平行板コンデンサ C 2aの静電容量の 和である C 2 ωとの大小関係は、 C l w> C 2 wとなり、 先に述べた演算装 置 3 0で演算される ( C 2 ω— C , 1U ) の値は、 負の値となる。 図 9 にお いては、 このような状態であることを、 —記号によって表してある。 一方、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 においては、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0 とは逆に、 C l w<C 2„となり、 演算装置 3 0で演算される (C ^— d の値は、 正の値となる。 図 9においては、 このような状態であるこ とを、 +記号によって表してある。 As a result, in the first g-ω sensor 50, the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C la and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2b, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C lb the magnitude relation between C 2 omega is the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2a, C lw> C 2 w , and the is computed by the computing equipment 3 0 described previously (C 2 ω - C, The value of 1U ) is negative. In Fig. 9, such a state is represented by a symbol. On the other hand, in the second g-ω sensor 51 , contrary to the first g-ω sensor 50 , C lw <C 2 „, and the arithmetic unit 30 calculates (C ^ −d The value is a positive value In Fig. 9, such a state is indicated by a + sign.
また、 角速度が上述したのとは逆方向に作用した場合には、 第 1の g 一 ωセンサ 5 0の錘体 3 Αの変位と、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 の錘体 3 Βの変位は、 上述の場合と丁度逆の状態となる。 したがって、 第 1 の g — ωセンサ 5 0 においては、 C く C 2 wとなり、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 においては、 C , ω > C 2 ωとなる。 When the angular velocity acts in the opposite direction to that described above, the displacement of the weight 3 の of the first g-ω sensor 50 and the weight 3 の of the second g-ω sensor 51 are changed. Is in a state exactly opposite to that described above. Therefore, in the first g—ω sensor 50, C is less than C 2 w , and in the second g—ω sensor 51, C, ω > C 2 ω .
それ故、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 のそれぞれについて. 演算装置 3 0によってそれぞれ得られる電圧信号 Vou の大小関係も、 上述したような錘体 3 A > 3 Bの変位に応じたもの、 換言すれば、 角速 度の大きさと方向に応じだものとなるため、 その大小関係から角速度の 方向を知ることができ、 また、 その大きさから角速度を知ることができ ることとなる。 Therefore, for each of the first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51, the magnitude relationship between the voltage signals Vou respectively obtained by the arithmetic unit 30 is also determined by the weight 3A > 3B as described above. Since it depends on the displacement, in other words, on the magnitude and direction of the angular velocity, the direction of the angular velocity can be known from the magnitude relation, and the angular velocity can be known from the magnitude. The Rukoto.
次に、 角加速度の検出について図 1 0 を参照しつつ説明する。 Next, detection of angular acceleration will be described with reference to FIG.
例えば、 図 1 0において、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1か ら等しい距離にある仮想中心点〇 ' を中心にして、 いわゆる反時計方向 に角加速度 (dco/dt) が作用したとする。 For example, in FIG. 10, a so-called counterclockwise direction is set around a virtual center point 〇 ′ at an equal distance from the first and second g−ω sensors 50 and 51. Suppose that angular acceleration (dco / dt) acts on.
かかる場合において、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1の錘体 3 A, 3 Βは、 角加速度が作用する前の平衡状態の位置 (図 1 0におい て点線で示された位置) から、 同図において実線で示されたような位置 へ変位することとなる。 すなわち、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0の錘体 3 A は、 その中心点 Oを中心にして、 図 1 0において左側の部位が第 2のガ ラス基板 2 A側へ変位する一方、 中心点 Oより右側の部位は、 第 1のガ ラス基板 1 A側へ変位することとなる。 また、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 の錘体 3 Βは、 その中心点〇を中心にして、 図 1 0において左側の部位 が第 2のガラス基板 2 Β側へ変位する一方、 中心点〇より右側の部位は, 第 1 のガラス基板 1 Β側へ変位することとなる。 In such a case, the weights 3 A, 3 の of the first and second g−ω sensors 50, 51 are positioned in an equilibrium state before the angular acceleration acts (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 10). From the position shown in the figure) to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. In other words, the weight 3 A of the first g—ω sensor 50 has its left portion displaced toward the second glass substrate 2 A side in FIG. The portion on the right side of the point O is displaced toward the first glass substrate 1A. In addition, the weight 3 の of the second g—ω sensor 51 has a center point 中心 as a center, and the left portion in FIG. 10 is displaced toward the second glass substrate 2 Β, while the center point Β The portion on the right side of 変 位 is displaced to the first glass substrate 1 Β side.
その結果、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0においては、 平行板コンデンサ C laの静電容量と平行板コンデンサ C2bの静電容量の和である C l w' と、 平行板コンデンサ C lbの静電容量と平行板コンデンサ C 2aの静電容量の 和である C 2 ノ との大小関係は、 C , < C ノ となり、 先に図 6で 述べたように演算装置 3 0で演算される ( C ' - C , , ) の値は、 正の値となる。 図 1 0 においては、 このような状態であることを、 +記 号によって表してある。 As a result, in the first g—ω sensor 50, C lw ′, which is the sum of the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C la and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C2b, and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C lb the magnitude relation between C 2 Bruno is the sum of the capacitance of the capacitor and the parallel plate capacitor C 2a, C, is computed by the computing unit 3 0 as described in FIG. 6 <C Bruno, and the first (C '-The value of C,,) is positive. In FIG. 10, such a state is indicated by a + sign.
一方、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 においても、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0 と同様に、 C , ,,ノ < C 2„ ' となり、 先に図 6で述べたように演算装置 3 0で演算される ( C 2ノ — C ,ノ ) の値は、 正の値となる。 図 1 ◦ においては、 このような状態であることを、 +記号によって表してある, また、 角加速度が上述したのとは逆方向に作用した場合には、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0の錘体 3 Αの変位と、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1の錘体 3 Βの変位は、 上述の場合と丁度逆の状態となる。 したがって、 第 1及 び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 においては、 共に C l w ' <C 2ノ と なる。 On the other hand, in the second g—ω sensor 51 as well, as in the case of the first g—ω sensor 50, C, ,, <C 2 、 ′, and as described above with reference to FIG. The value of (C 2 no — C, no) calculated by 30 is a positive value.In Fig. 1 ◦, this is indicated by a + sign, and the angle When the acceleration acts in a direction opposite to that described above, the displacement of the first g—ω sensor 50 weight 3 の and the displacement of the second g—ω sensor 51 1 weight 3 Β Is just the opposite of the case described above. Therefore, in the first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51 , both C lw ′ <C 2 Become.
それ故、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 のそれぞれについて, 先に図 6で述べたようにして演算装置 3 0によってそれぞれ得られる電 圧信号 V o u ' の大小関係も、 上述したような錘体 3 A, 3 Bの変位 に応じたもの、 換言すれば、 角加速度の大きさと方向に応じたものとな るため、 その大小関係から角加速度の方向を知ることができ、 また、 そ の大きさから角速度を知ることができることとなる。 Therefore, for each of the first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51, the magnitude relationship of the voltage signals V ou ′ obtained by the arithmetic unit 30 as described above with reference to FIG. However, since it depends on the displacement of the weights 3A and 3B as described above, in other words, on the magnitude and direction of the angular acceleration, it is possible to know the direction of the angular acceleration from the magnitude relation. It is possible to know the angular velocity from its magnitude.
この発明の実施の形態における移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサは、 上 述したように第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 の出力に基づく演 算装置 3 0の各々の電圧信号の大小関係によって、 加速度、 角速度及び 角加速度の各々について、 その大きさ及び方向を知ることができるもの であるが、 それぞれの電圧信号の大小関係の判定は、 例えば、 いわゆる C P Uを用いてなり、 車両に設けられ、 車両における種々のいわゆる電 子制御を行う制御装置 (図示せず) において行われるようにするのが好 適である。 As described above, the multi-sensor for mobile object basic information according to the embodiment of the present invention includes a voltage signal of each of the arithmetic devices 30 based on the outputs of the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51. The magnitude and direction of each of the acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration can be known from the magnitude relation of, but the magnitude relation of each voltage signal is determined using, for example, a so-called CPU. It is preferable that the control is performed by a control device (not shown) provided in the vehicle and performing various so-called electronic controls in the vehicle.
この場合、 処理能力の高い C P Uを用いるようにすれば、 例えば、 先 の演算装置 3 0を構成する C P Uと、 上述の制御装置を構成する C P U とを共通のものとし、 その C P Uにおいて一連の処理を行わしめるよう にしてもよい。 すなわち、 この場合、 先に図 5や図 6で述べたような電 圧信号を発生させる必要はなくなり、 全て C P U内部において、 ソフ ト ウェアによるいわゆる数値処理によって、 上述したような加速度、 角速 度及び角加速度の大きさ及び方向について知ることができるようにする ことができる。 In this case, if a CPU having a high processing capacity is used, for example, the CPU configuring the arithmetic unit 30 and the CPU configuring the control device described above are shared, and a series of processing is performed by the CPU. May be performed. In other words, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the voltage signals as previously described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, and the acceleration and the angular velocity as described above are all performed inside the CPU by so-called numerical processing by software. And the magnitude and direction of the angular acceleration.
図 1 1 には、 そのように C P Uを用いて一連の処理を行う場合の基本 的な処理手順の一例が示されており、 以下、 同図を参照しつつその処理 手順について説明することとする。 この一連の処理は、 例えば、 図示さ れないいわゆるメインル一チン処理の中のサブルーチン処理として実行 されるものである。 FIG. 11 shows an example of a basic processing procedure when a series of processing is performed using the CPU in such a manner.The processing procedure will be described below with reference to FIG. . This series of processes, for example, This is executed as a subroutine process in the so-called main routine process.
処理が開始されると、 まず、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 の容量の入力がなされることとなる (図 1 1 のステップ 1 0 0参照) 。 すなわち、 先に、 図 5や図 6で説明したように、 第 1及び第 2の g— ω センサ 5 0, 5 1の各々の平行板コンデンサ C l, C 2, C 1 a , C lb, C 2a, C 2bについての静電容量値が C P U (図示せず) に読み込まれる こととなる。 When the process is started, first, the capacitances of the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 are input (see step 100 in FIG. 11). That is, as described earlier with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the parallel plate capacitors C l, C 2, C 1 a, C lb, of the first and second g-ω sensors 50, 51 respectively. The capacitance values for C 2a and C 2b will be read into the CPU (not shown).
次に、 上述のようにして入力された静電容量値を基に、 容量変化分の 差が演算されることとなる (図 1 1のステップ 1 0 2参照) 。 すなわち, 先に述べたように第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 の各々につい ての ( C 2g— C lg) 、 ( C 2 ω - C , ω ) 及び ( C 2 l,, ' — C ,ノ ) がそれ ぞれ演算されることとなる。 Next, the difference in the capacitance change is calculated based on the capacitance value input as described above (see step 102 in FIG. 11). That is, previously mentioned as first and second g- omega sensor 5 0, 5 1 of each marked with a (C 2g- C lg), ( C 2 ω - C, ω) and (C 2 l ,, '— C, ノ) will be calculated respectively.
そして、 予め記憶されている対応テーブルに基づいて、 これらの演算 値についての大小比較がなされることとなる (図 1 1 のステップ 1 0 4 参照) 。 Then, based on the correspondence table stored in advance, the magnitudes of these calculated values are compared (see step 104 in FIG. 11).
すなわち、 例えば、 (C 2g— C lg) を例に採れば、 第 1及び第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 についての各々の (C2g— C lg) の演算値として 生じ得る数値と、 その際の加速度の方向及び大きさとの対応関係が、 予 め実験データ等に基づいて設定されて対応テーブルとして C P U (図示 せず) 内部の記憶領域 (または外部の記憶素子等) に記憶されており、 ステップ 1 0 2により演算された ( C2g— C lg) の 2つの値が対応テ一 ブルに規定される大小関係を満たすか否かが判定される。 That is, for example, taking (C 2g—C lg) as an example, the numerical values that can occur as the calculated values of (C2g—C lg) for the first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51, respectively, The relationship between the direction and magnitude of the acceleration at that time is set in advance based on experimental data and the like, and stored in a storage area (or an external storage element or the like) inside the CPU (not shown) as a correspondence table. It is determined whether or not the two values (C2g-Clg) calculated in step 102 satisfy the magnitude relation defined in the corresponding table.
他の (C 2 (U— C I W) 及び (C 2 - C , ) についても、 同様に所 定の対応テーブルに基づいて、 生じ得る値であるか否かが判定されるこ ととなる。 そして、 加速度、 角速度または角加速度のいずれかの対応テーブルに 該当する 2つの演算値の対応関係があると判定された場合には、 その対 応関係に基づいて、 加速度、 角速度または角加速度のいずれかについて. その方向及び大きさが決定されることとなる (図 1 1のステップ 1 0 6 参照) 。 Similarly, for the other (C 2 (U — C IW ) and (C 2 -C,)), it is determined whether they are possible values based on a predetermined correspondence table. If it is determined that there is a correspondence between the two calculated values corresponding to any one of the acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration correspondence tables, one of the acceleration, the angular velocity, and the angular acceleration is determined based on the correspondence. The direction and size will be determined (see step 106 in FIG. 11).
なお、 一連の処理が終了した後は、 図示されないメインル一チンへ戻 ることとなる。 After a series of processing is completed, the process returns to the main routine (not shown).
なお、 上述の説明においては、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1の基板 5 2上での配置を、 Θ , = Θ = 4 5度となるようにしたが、 Θ , = Θ2であれば、 勿論他の角度に設定してもよいものである。 但し、 この場合には、 先の式 1 4における sin© cos®の値が 「 1 Z 2」 ではな くなり、 式 1 5における定数 「 1 2」 は、 その際の角度に応じた他の数 値となる。 In the above description, the arrangement of the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 on the substrate 52 is such that Θ, = Θ = 45 degrees. if = theta 2, in which it may be set, of course other angles. However, in this case, the value of sin © cos® in Equation 14 is no longer “1 Z 2”, and the constant “1 2” in Equation 15 is different from that of the other angles corresponding to the angle at that time. It is a numerical value.
次に、 上述した構成を有してなる第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1が接続されて、 入力された信号に基づいて角速度等の値を演算出力 する演算装置の構成例について図 1 2乃至図 1 4を参照しつつ説明する, なお、 説明の便宜上、 図 1 2及び図 1 3に示されたように、 X, Υ, Ζ の互いに直交する 3軸による 3次元座標を定義することとする。 ここで. Ζ軸は鉛直方向に沿うものとする。 Next, a configuration of an arithmetic unit to which the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 having the above-described configuration are connected to calculate and output a value such as an angular velocity based on an input signal Examples will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. For convenience of explanation, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, three-dimensional X, Υ, Ζ by three axes orthogonal to each other. The coordinates will be defined. Here, the Ζ axis runs along the vertical direction.
最初に、 第 1の構成例について図 1 2を参照しつつ説明する。 First, a first configuration example will be described with reference to FIGS.
この構成例における演算装置 3 0 Αは、 第 1乃至第 4のコン トロール ユニッ ト (図 1 2においては、 それぞれ 「 CZU ( 1 ) 」 、 「CZU ( 2 ) 」 、 「CZU ( 3 ) 」 、 「。ダ11 (4 ) 」 と表記) 3 1〜 3 4と, 第 1及び第 2の減算器 3 5 , 3 6と、 第 1及び第 2の加算器 3 7, 3 8 と、 ローパスフィル夕 3 9と、 第 1乃至第 4の緩衝増幅器 4 0〜 4 3と を有して構成されたものとなっている。 第 1 のコントロールユニッ ト 3 1 は、 第 1の C/U用第 1及び第 2の 入力端子 4 4 a, 4 4 b並びに第 1 の共通端子 4 4 c を有しており、 第 1 の C ZU用第 1の入力端子 4 4 aには、 第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0の第 2の角速度検出用電極 1 9 Αと第 3の角度速度検出用電極 2 3 Aが接続 され、 第 1 の C ZU用第 2の入力端子 4 4 bには、 第 1 の角速度検出用 電極 1 8 Aと第 4の角速度検出用電極 2 4 Aが接続されている。 The arithmetic unit 30 # in this configuration example includes first to fourth control units (in FIG. 12, "CZU (1)", "CZU (2)", "CZU (3)", 3 1 to 3 4, first and second subtracters 35 and 36, first and second adders 37 and 38, and low-pass fill It is configured to include a receiver 39 and first to fourth buffer amplifiers 40 to 43. The first control unit 31 has first and second input terminals 44 a and 44 b for the first C / U, and a first common terminal 44 c. To the first input terminal 44 a for C ZU, the second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 の of the first g—ω sensor 50 and the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23 A are connected, A first angular velocity detecting electrode 18A and a fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24A are connected to the first CZU second input terminal 44b.
また、 第 1 の共通端子 4 4 c は、 次述する第 2のコントロールュニッ ト 3 2 と共用されるものとなっており、 第 1 の g — Coセンサ 5 0の支持 柱 1 1 Aが第 7の配線接続孔 1 5 g (図 2参照) に充填された導電性部 材を介して接続されている。 換言すれば、 錘体 3 Aが第 1の共通端子 4 4 cに接続されたものとなっている。 Further, the first common terminal 44 c is used in common with the second control unit 32 described below, and the support column 11 A of the first g—Co sensor 50 is used. The connection is made via the conductive material filled in the seventh wiring connection hole 15 g (see FIG. 2). In other words, the weight 3A is connected to the first common terminal 44c.
したがって、 第 1 のコントロールユニッ ト 3 1 においては、 第 1 の C ダ U用第 1 の入力端子 4 4 aと第 1 の共通端子 4 4 c との間に、 第 2の 角速度検出用電極 1 9 Aと錘体 3 Aとの間で形成される平行板コンデン サ C lbの静電容量と第 3の角速度検出用電極 2 3 Aと錘体 3 Aとの間で 形成される平行板コンデンサ C 2aの静電容量の和 C ^ ' (第 1 の角速 度静電容量) が得られることとなる。 Therefore, in the first control unit 31, the second angular velocity detecting electrode 1 is connected between the first C terminal U first input terminal 44 a and the first common terminal 44 c. Parallel plate capacitor formed between 9 A and weight 3 A Capacitance of C lb and third plate for angular velocity detection 23 Parallel plate capacitor formed between weight 3 A and weight 3 A The sum of the capacitances of C 2a C ^ '(first angular velocity capacitance) is obtained.
また、 第 1 の C/U用第 2の入力端子 4 4 bと第 1 の共通端子 4 4 c との間に、 第 1の角速度検出用電極 1 8 Aと錘体 3 Aとの間で形成され る平行板コンデンサ C 1 aの静電容量と第 4の角速度検出用電極 2 4 A と錘体 3 Aとの間で形成される平行板コンデンサ C 2bの静電容量の和 C 1 ω' (第 2の角速度静電容量) が得られることとなる。 In addition, between the first C / U second input terminal 44 b and the first common terminal 44 c, between the first angular velocity detecting electrode 18 A and the weight 3 A The sum of the capacitance of the formed parallel plate capacitor C 1 a and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2 b formed between the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 A and the weight 3 A C 1 ω '(The second angular velocity capacitance).
そして、 第 1 のコン トロールユニッ ト 3 1 は、 上述の静電容量 C 2 と静電容量 C , との差 (C 2,ノ — C , ) を演算して出力するよ うになつている。 The first control unit 31 calculates and outputs the difference (C 2 , NO−C) between the above-mentioned capacitance C 2 and capacitance C, and outputs the result.
この第 1 のコントロールユニッ ト 3 1 の出力信号は、 第 1 の減算器 3 5と第 1の加算器 3 7 にそれぞれ入力されるようになっている (図 1 2 参照) 。 The output signal of the first control unit 31 is supplied to the first subtractor 3 5 and the first adder 37, respectively (see Fig. 12).
第 2のコントロールュニッ ト 3 2は、 第 2の C/U用第 1及び第 2の 入力端子 4 5 a, 4 5 b並びに第 1 の共通端子 4 4 c を有しており、 第 2の C ZU用第 1 の入力端子 4 5 aには、 第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0の第 1の加速度検出用電極 1 7 Αが接続され、 第 2の CZU用第 2の入力端 子 4 5 bには、 第 2の加速度検出用電極 2 2 Aが接続されている。 The second control unit 32 has first and second input terminals 45 a and 45 b for the second C / U, and a first common terminal 44 c. The first g-ω sensor 50 first acceleration detecting electrode 17 の is connected to the CZU first input terminal 45 a of the second CZU, and the second CZU second input terminal The second acceleration detecting electrode 22 A is connected to 45 b.
したがって、 第 2のコントロールユニッ ト 3 2 においては、 第 2の C ZU用第 1の入力端子 4 5 aと第 1 の共通端子 4 4 c との間には、 第 1 の加速度検出用電極 1 7 Aと錘体 3 Aとの間で形成される平行板コンデ ンサ C 1の静電容量 C lgが得られる一方、 第 2の CZU用第 2の入力端 子 4 5 bと第 1の共通端子 4 4 c との間には、 第 2の加速度検出用電極 2 2 Aと錘体 3 Aとの間で形成される平行板コンデンサ C2の静電容量 C 2gが得られることとなる。 Therefore, in the second control unit 32, the first acceleration detection electrode 1 is connected between the second CZU first input terminal 45a and the first common terminal 44c. The capacitance C lg of the parallel plate capacitor C 1 formed between 7 A and the weight 3 A is obtained, while the second CZU second input terminal 45 b and the first common The capacitance C 2g of the parallel plate capacitor C2 formed between the second acceleration detecting electrode 22A and the weight 3A is obtained between the terminal 44c and the terminal 44c.
そして、 この第 2のコントロールユニッ ト 3 2は、 上述の静電容量 C 2g, C lgの差 (C 2g— C lg) を演算して出力するようになっており、 そ の出力信号は、 第 2の減算器 3 6及び第 2の加算器 3 8にそれぞれ入力 される構成となっている (図 1 2参照) 。 The second control unit 32 calculates and outputs the difference between the above-mentioned capacitances C 2g and C lg (C 2g − C lg), and the output signal is It is configured to be input to the second subtractor 36 and the second adder 38, respectively (see FIG. 12).
第 3及び第 4のコン トロールユニッ ト 3 3 , 3 4は、 第 2の g— ωセ ンサ 5 1 に対するもので、 第 3のコントロールュニッ ト 3 3は、 先の第 1のコントロールユニッ ト 3 1 と同様の構成、 機能を有し、 第 4のコン トロールュニッ ト 3 4は、 第 2のコントロールュニッ ト 3 2 と同様の構 成、 機能を有するものとなっている。 The third and fourth control units 33, 34 are for the second g-ω sensor 51, and the third control unit 33 is for the first control unit. The fourth control unit 34 has the same configuration and function as the first control unit 32, and the fourth control unit 34 has the same configuration and function as the second control unit 32.
すなわち、 第 3の C /U用第 1 の入力端子 4 6 aには、 第 2の g— ω センサ 5 1の第 2の角速度検出用電極 1 9 Βと第 3の角速度検出用電極 2 3 Βが接続され、 第 3の C ZU用第 2の入力端子 4 6 bには、 第 1の 角速度検出用電極 1 8 Bと第 4の角速度検出用電極 2 4 Bが接続されて いる。 That is, the third input terminal 46 a for C / U is connected to the second angular velocity detecting electrode 19 の of the second g—ω sensor 51 and the third angular velocity detecting electrode 23接 続 is connected, and the third C ZU second input terminal 46 b is connected to the first C ZU. The angular velocity detecting electrode 18 B and the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 B are connected.
また、 第 2の共通端子 4 6 c は、 次述する第 4のコン トロールュニッ ト 3 4 と共用されるものとなっており、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1の支持 柱 1 1 Βが第 7の配線接続孔 1 6 g (図 2参照) に充填された導電性部 材を介して接続されている。 換言すれば、 錘体 3 Bが、 第 2の共通端子 4 6 cに接続されたものとなっている。 The second common terminal 46 c is used in common with the fourth control unit 34 described below, and the support column 11 の of the second g—ω sensor 51 The connection is made via the conductive material filled in the wiring connection hole 16 g (see Fig. 2). In other words, the weight 3B is connected to the second common terminal 46c.
したがって、 第 3のコントロールユニッ ト 3 3においては、 第 3の C /U用第 1 の入力端子 4 6 a と第 2の共通端子 4 6 c との間に、 第 2の 角速度検出用電極 1 9 Bと錘体 3 Bとの間で形成される平行板コンデン サ C lbの静電容量と第 3の角速度検出用電極 2 3 Bと錘体 3 Bとの間で 形成される平行板コンデンサ C 2aの静電容量の和 C 2 (,ノ (第 3の角速 度静電容量) が得られることとなる。 Therefore, in the third control unit 33, the second angular velocity detecting electrode 1 is connected between the third C / U first input terminal 46a and the second common terminal 46c. Parallel plate capacitor formed between 9 B and weight 3 B Capacitance of C lb and third plate for angular velocity detection 23 Parallel plate capacitor formed between weight 3 B and weight 3 B The sum of the capacitances of C 2a, C 2 ( , ノ (third angular velocity capacitance), is obtained.
また、 第 3の C/U用第 2の入力端子 4 6 bと第 2の共通端子 4 6 c との間に、 第 1の角速度検出用電極 1 8 Bと錘体 3 Bとの間で形成され る平行板コンデンサ C 1 aの静電容量と第 4の角速度検出用電極 2 4 B と錘体 3 Bとの間で形成される平行板コンデンサ C 2bの静電容量の和 C ,ノ (第 4の角速度静電容量) が得られることとなる。 Also, between the third C / U second input terminal 46 b and the second common terminal 46 c, between the first angular velocity detecting electrode 18 B and the weight 3 B The sum of the capacitance of the formed parallel plate capacitor C 1 a and the capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor C 2 b formed between the fourth angular velocity detecting electrode 24 B and the weight 3 B, C (The fourth angular velocity capacitance).
そして、 第 3のコン ト ロールユニッ ト 3 3 は、 上述の静電容量 C 2 と静電容量 C l w' との差 (C ノ - C ,„ ) を演算して出力するよ うになつている。 Then, the third control unit 33 calculates and outputs the difference (C no -C, „) between the above-mentioned capacitance C 2 and the capacitance C lw ′.
この第 3のコントロールュニッ ト 3 3の出力信号は、 第 1 の減算器 3 5 と第 1 の加算器 3 7 にそれぞれ入力されるようになっている (図 1 2 参照) 。 The output signal of the third control unit 33 is input to the first subtractor 35 and the first adder 37 (see FIG. 12).
なお、 この第 3のコントロールユニッ ト 3 3において得られる第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 の ( C 2 ' - C , ω ' ) を、 これより以下の説明にお いては、 便宜上、 (C 2ノ - C , ω ' ) 2と表すこととする。 (C 2 ′ -C, ω ′) of the second g—ω sensor 51 obtained in the third control unit 33 will be described in the following description. Therefore, for convenience, it is expressed as (C 2 -−C, ω ′) 2 .
第 4のコン トロールュニッ 卜 3 4は、 第 4の C ZU用第 1及び第 2の 入力端子 4 7 a , 4 7 b並びに第 2の共通端子 4 6 c を有しており、 第 4の C ZU用第 1の入力端子 4 7 aには、 第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 1の第 1の加速度検出用電極 1 7 Βが接続され、 第 4の C /U用第 2の入力端 子 4 7 bには、 第 2の加速度検出用電極 2 2 Bが接続されている。 The fourth control unit 34 has first and second input terminals 47a and 47b for the fourth CZU and a second common terminal 46c. The first acceleration detection electrode 17 の of the second g—ω sensor 51 is connected to the first input terminal 47 a for ZU, and the second input terminal for C / U is connected to the fourth g—ω sensor 51. The second acceleration detecting electrode 22B is connected to 47b.
したがって、 第 4のコントロールユニッ ト 3 4においては、 第 4の C /U用第 1 の入力端子 4 7 aと第 2の共通端子 4 6 c との間には、 第 1 の加速度検出用電極 1 7 Bと錘体 3 Bとの間で形成される平行板コンデ ンサ C 1の静電容量 C lgが得られる一方、 第 4の C ZU用第 2の入力端 子 4 7 bと第 2の共通端子 4 6 c との間には、 第 2の加速度検出用電極 2 2 Bと錘体 3 Bとの間で形成される平行板コンデンサ C 2の静電容量 C 2gが得られることとなる。 Therefore, in the fourth control unit 34, the first acceleration detection electrode is provided between the fourth C / U first input terminal 47a and the second common terminal 46c. While the capacitance C lg of the parallel plate capacitor C 1 formed between 17 B and the weight 3 B is obtained, the fourth C ZU second input terminal 47 b and the second Between the second acceleration detecting electrode 22B and the weight 3B between the common terminal 46c and the common terminal 46c of the parallel plate capacitor C2. Become.
そして、 この第 4のコントロールユニッ ト 3 4は、 上述の静電容量 C 2g, C lgの差 (C 2g— C lg) を演算して出力するようになっており、 そ の出力信号は、 第 2の減算器 3 6及び第 2の加算器 3 8にそれぞれ入力 される構成となっている (図 1 2参照) 。 The fourth control unit 34 calculates and outputs the difference between the above-mentioned capacitances C 2g and C lg (C 2g-C lg), and the output signal is It is configured to be input to the second subtractor 36 and the second adder 38, respectively (see FIG. 12).
なお、 この第 4のコントロールュニッ ト 3 4において得られる第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 1の ( C 2g— C lg) を、 これより以下の説明においては、 便宜上、 (C 2g— C lg) 二,と表すこととする。 The second g—ω sensor 51 obtained in the fourth control unit 34 (C 2g—C lg) is hereinafter referred to as (C 2g—C lg) for convenience. ) I will express it as two.
第 1 の減算器 3 5は、 上述した第 1 のコントロールユニッ ト 3 1の演 算出力信号 ( C 2( — C hノ ) と、 第 3のコン トロールユニッ ト 3 3 の演算出力信号 (C 2,ノ - C , ( ) 2が入力されるようになっており、 その入力信号の差、 すなわち、 { ( C 2ノ 一 C ,ノ ) 一 (C 2ノ - C , ω ' ) } が演算され出力されるようになっているものである。 そして、 この第 1の減算器 3 5の演算出力信号は、 口一パスフィルタ 3 9に入力 されるようになつている。 The first subtractor 35 is configured to output the calculated force signal (C 2 (—Ch no)) of the first control unit 31 described above and the calculated output signal (C C of the third control unit 33). 2 , no -C, ( ) 2 is input, and the difference between the input signals, that is, {(C 2 no-C, no) 1 (C 2 no-C, ω ')} is The operation output signal of the first subtractor 35 is input to the one-pass filter 39. It has become to be.
ローパスフィル夕 3 9は、 第 1 の減算器 3 5からの演算出力信号の周 波数成分の内、 所定の低域周波数帯の信号のみを通過させるベく設けら れたもので、 具体的には、 例えば 5乃至 1 0 H z以下の周波数の信号を 通過させるように設定されたものが好適である。 The low-pass filter 39 is provided to pass only a signal in a predetermined low frequency band among the frequency components of the operation output signal from the first subtractor 35. For example, it is preferable that the filter is set so as to pass a signal having a frequency of 5 to 10 Hz or less.
このような口一パスフィル夕 3 9 を設けるのは、 次のような理由によ るものである。 The reason why such a mouth-to-pass fill is established is as follows.
まず、 第 1 の減算器 3 5の演算出力信号は、 角速度の大きさを表すも のであるが、 角速度が生ずる際の車両の運動を考えると、 その運動の速 度は、 一般に大凡 5 0 0 m s e c程度である。 換言すれば、 この角速度が 生ずる運動状態において、 本発明に係る移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサ Sによって計測される信号の最適な周波数成分としては、 大凡 5 H z以 下となる。 First, the operation output signal of the first subtractor 35 represents the magnitude of the angular velocity. Considering the movement of the vehicle when the angular velocity occurs, the speed of the movement is generally about 500 It is about msec. In other words, in the motion state in which the angular velocity occurs, the optimal frequency component of the signal measured by the moving object basic information multi-sensor S according to the present invention is approximately 5 Hz or less.
そのため、 角速度を求める上で必要な情報を失うことがないようにし て、 不要な高い周波数成分を除去する観点から、 第 1 の減算器 3 5の出 力側に口一パスフィル夕 3 9が設けられている。 これにより、 信号対雑 音比が向上することとなる。 Therefore, from the viewpoint of eliminating unnecessary high frequency components without losing information necessary for calculating the angular velocity, a first pass filter 35 is provided at the output side of the first subtractor 35. Have been. As a result, the signal-to-noise ratio is improved.
第 1 の加算器 3 7は、 上述した第 1 のコントロールユニッ ト 3 1 の演 算出力信号 (。 2ノ - C ,„ ) と、 第 3のコン トロールユニッ ト 3 3 の演算出力信号 (〇 2 (ノ - C , ; ) 2とが入力されるようになっており、 その入力信号の和、 すなわち { ( C 2ノ 一 C ,ノ ) + ( C 2 ω ' - C , ω ' ) 2 } が演算され、 出力されるようになっている。 そして、 その演 算出力信号は、 第 2の緩衝増幅器 4 1 を介して外部へ出力されるように なっている。 The first adder 3 7, the first control unit 3 first Starring calculating power signal described above (2 Bruno -. C, ") and, third Control unit 3 3 operation output signal (〇 2 (ノ-C ,; ) 2 and the sum of the input signals, that is, ((C 2ノ C, ノ) + (C 2 ω '-C, ω ') 2 } Is calculated and output, and the calculation force signal is output to the outside via the second buffer amplifier 41.
第 2の減算器 3 6は、 上述した第 2のコントロールユニッ ト 3 2の演 算出力信号 (C 2 g— C l g) と、 第 4のコントロールユニッ ト 3 4の演算 出力信号 (C 2g— C lg) とが入力されるようになっており、 その入力 信号の差、 すなわち、 { ( C 2g- C lg) ― ( C 2g— C lg) , } が演算さ れ、 出力されるようになっている。 そして、 その演算出力信号は、 第 3 の緩衝増幅器 4 2を介して外部へ出力されるようになっている。 The second subtractor 36 is used to calculate the above-described calculated force signal (C 2 g—C lg) of the second control unit 32 and to calculate the fourth control unit 34. The output signal (C2g-Clg) is input, and the difference between the input signals, that is, ((C2g-Clg)-(C2g-Clg),} is calculated. , Is output. The operation output signal is output to the outside via the third buffer amplifier 42.
第 2の加算器 3 8は、 上述した第 2のコントロールユニッ ト 3 2の演 算出力信号 (C 2g— C lg) と、 第 4のコン トロールユニッ ト 3 4の演算 出力信号 ( C 2g— C lg) 2とが入力されるようになっており、 その入力 信号の和、 すなわち、 { ( C 2g~ C lg) 十 ( C 2g— C lg) } が演算さ れ、 出力されるようになっている。 そして、 その演算出力信号は、 第 4 の緩衝増幅器 4 3を介して外部へ出力されるようになっている。 The second adder 38 outputs the above-described calculated force signal (C 2g—C lg) of the second control unit 32 and the operation output signal (C 2g—C of the fourth control unit 34). C lg) 2 and the sum of the input signals, that is, {(C 2g ~ C lg) tens (C 2g—C lg)} is calculated and output. Has become. The operation output signal is output to the outside via the fourth buffer amplifier 43.
次に、 上記構成における動作について説明する。 Next, the operation in the above configuration will be described.
まず、 前提として第 1及び第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 は、 直交す る平面部分を有する取付冶具 4 5に固着された状態にあって、 しかも、 先に図 1 を参照しつつ説明したように、 それぞれの g — ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 の中心を通る仮想的な直線が互いに直交するようにして、 車両の適 宜な位置に配設されているものとする。 First, as a premise, the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 are fixed to a mounting jig 45 having orthogonal plane portions, and first, referring to FIG. As described above, it is assumed that virtual straight lines passing through the centers of the respective g — ω sensors 50 and 51 are arranged at appropriate positions on the vehicle so as to be orthogonal to each other.
そして、 この場合も先に図 1 を参照しつつ説明したように、 第 1 の g — ωセンサ 5 0の 卜一シヨンバー 1 2 A, 1 3 A (図 2参照) と直交す る方向において、 第 1の g — ωセンサ 5 0の中心を通る仮想的な直線と Υ軸とのなす角度 Θ ,と、 第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 1 の後トーシヨ ンバー 1 2 Β . 1 3 Β (図 2参照) と直交する方向において、 第 2の g — ωセ ンサ 5 1 の中心を通る仮想的な直線と Υ軸とのなす角度 Θ 2とが共に、 4 5度になるように設定されたものとなっている。 In this case, as described above with reference to FIG. 1, in the direction orthogonal to the first bar 12A, 13A (see FIG. 2) of the first g—ω sensor 50, The first g — the angle between the imaginary straight line passing through the center of the ω sensor 50 and the Υ axis Θ, and the second g — the ω sensor 51 after the torsion bar 1 2 Β. 13 Β (Figure 2), the angle の2 between the imaginary straight line passing through the center of the second g — ω sensor 5 1 and the Υ axis is set to 45 degrees in the direction orthogonal to It has become something.
最初に、 加速度の計測について説明する。 First, measurement of acceleration will be described.
第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1が図 1 2に示されたような配 置構成において、 加速度が X軸方向に作用した場合について説明する。 この場合、 先に図 8を参照しつつ説明したように、 X軸方向の加速度の 大きさに応じて第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0 には、 錘体 3 Αに対して垂直方 向となる X 1 の方向 (図 1 2参照) に力が作用し、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 においては、 錘体 3 Βに対して垂直方向となる X 2の方向 (図 1 2 参照) に力が作用することとなる。 A case will be described in which the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 are arranged as shown in FIG. 12 and acceleration acts in the X-axis direction. In this case, as described earlier with reference to FIG. 8, the first g—ω sensor 50 has a direction perpendicular to the weight 3Α according to the magnitude of the acceleration in the X-axis direction. A force acts in the direction of X 1 (see FIG. 12), and in the second g—ω sensor 51, the direction of X 2 that is perpendicular to the weight 3 ((see FIG. 12) The force acts on.
その結果、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0からは、 第 2のコントロールュニ ッ ト 3 2を介して X 1方向 (図 1 2参照) に作用した力に応じて (C2g — C lg) が、 第 4のコントロールユニッ ト 3 4を介して X 2方向 (図 1 2参照) に作用した力に応じて ( C2g— C lg) が、 それぞれ得られる こととなる。 As a result, from the first g—ω sensor 50, the second control unit 32 sends a signal (C2g—Clg) according to the force acting in the X1 direction (see FIG. 12) via the second control unit 32. However, (C2g-Clg) is obtained according to the force acting in the X2 direction (see FIG. 12) via the fourth control unit 34.
図 8 を参照しつつ説明したように X軸方向の加速度を知るには、 原則 的には、 ( C 2g— C lg) 又は (C 2g— C lg) 2のいずれか一方が解れば よい。 As described with reference to FIG. 8, in order to know the acceleration in the X-axis direction, in principle, one of (C 2g−C lg) or (C 2g−C lg) 2 should be known.
この図 1 2に示された演算装置 3 O Aを用いた例においては、 第 2の コントロールユニッ ト 3 2により (C 2g— C lg) カ 、 第 4のコント口一 ルユニッ ト 3 4により ( C 2g— C lg) 2力 それぞれ得られるようにな つており、 両者の和が第 4の緩衝増幅器 4 3から X軸方向加速度の値と して出力されるようになっている。 すなわち、 この演算装置 3 O Aにお いては、 第 1 の g— センサ 5 0 と第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1の出力特性 のいわゆるばらつき等を考慮し、 そのばらつき等を相殺してより精度の 高い計測値を得る観点から、 ( C2g— C lg) と ( C 2g— C lg) 2との和 を X軸方向の加速度値に対応させたものとなっている。 In the example using the arithmetic unit 3 OA shown in FIG. 12, the second control unit 32 (C 2g—C lg) and the fourth control unit 34 (C 2 2g—C lg) Two forces can be obtained, and the sum of the two is output from the fourth buffer amplifier 43 as the value of the acceleration in the X-axis direction. That is, in the arithmetic unit 3OA, the output characteristics of the first g—sensor 50 and the second g—ω sensor 51 are taken into account, and so on. From the viewpoint of obtaining a high measured value, the sum of (C2g-Clg) and (C2g-Clg) 2 is made to correspond to the acceleration value in the X-axis direction.
次に、 Y軸方向の加速度が作用した場合について説明する。 Next, the case where the acceleration in the Y-axis direction acts will be described.
この場合も基本的には、 X軸方向の加速度が作用した場合と同様であ る。 In this case, the operation is basically the same as when the acceleration in the X-axis direction is applied.
既に、 図 8 ( B ) を用いて説明したように加速度を知るには、 原則的 には、 (C 2g— C lg) 又は ( C 2g— C lg) 2のいずれか一方が得られれ ばよいが、 上述したように、 この図 1 2 に示された演算装置 3 0 Aを用 いた例においては、 計測精度の向上を図る観点から、 (C2g— C lg) と (C 2g— C lg) 2との和が、 第 2の減算器 3 6の演算により求められて、 第 3の緩衝増幅器 4 2から Y軸方向の加速度の大きさを表す値として出 力されるようになっている。 なお、 ここで、 (C2g_ C lg) と ( C 2g— C lg) との和を求めるのに、 第 2の減算器 3 6による減算を行うのは、 図 8 ( B ) を用いて説明したように Y軸方向の加速度が作用した場合、 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0による (C 2g— C lg) と第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 による (C2g— C lg) 2の極性は、 相互に逆となるためである。 As already described with reference to Fig. 8 (B), to know the acceleration, It is sufficient that either (C 2g—C lg) or (C 2g—C lg) 2 is obtained, but as described above, the arithmetic unit 30 A shown in FIG. In the example, the sum of (C2g—C lg) and (C 2g—C lg) 2 is obtained by the operation of the second subtractor 36 from the viewpoint of improving the measurement accuracy. Is output from the buffer amplifier 42 as a value representing the magnitude of the acceleration in the Y-axis direction. Here, the subtraction by the second subtractor 36 for obtaining the sum of (C2g_C lg) and (C 2g—C lg) has been described with reference to FIG. 8 (B). If the acceleration in the Y-axis direction is applied as, according to the first g- omega sensor 5 0 (C 2g- C lg) According to a second g- omega sensor 5 1 polarity (C2g- C lg) 2 is This is because they are mutually opposite.
次に、 角速度の計測について説明する。 Next, measurement of the angular velocity will be described.
例えば、 X軸を中心とするような角速度が作用したとすると、 先に図 9を参照しつつ説明したように角速度を知るには、 原則的には、 第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0 により得られる ( C 2ノ — C l (,ノ ) 又は第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 により得られる (C 2ノ - C , , ) 2のいずれか一方が得 られればよい。 For example, if an angular velocity acting about the X axis acts, to know the angular velocity as described above with reference to FIG. 9, in principle, the first g—ω sensor 50 obtained (C 2 Bruno - C l (, Roh) or second g- omega obtained by the sensor 5 1 (C 2 Bruno - C,,) one of the 2 only needs to be obtained.
しかしながら、 先の加速度の場合と同様に、 この図 1 2に示された演 算装置 3 0 Aを用いた例においては、 計測精度の向上を図る観点から、 第 1 の減算器 3 5により、 ( C 2 'ノ - C , ω ' ) と ( C 2ノ - C , ( ) 2との和が演算されて、 口一パスフィル夕 3 9及び第 1 の緩衝増幅器 4 0を介して角速度の値として出力されるようになっている。 なお、 ここ で、 ( C 2ノ 一 C ,ノ ) と ( C 2ノ - C , ω ' ) 2との和を求めるのに、 第 1 の減算器 3 5による減算を行うのは、 図 9で説明したように第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0による ( C 2 w ' - C , ω ' ) と第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 による ( C 2 ω ' — C , ω ' ) 2との極性は、 相互に逆となるためである。 また、 第 1の減算器 3 5の演算出力信号をローパスフィル夕 3 9へ通 過せしめるのは、 既に説明したように角速度信号の変化特性に鑑みて、 不要な高周波成分を除去し、 角速度を知るために本来必要な周波数成分 のみを得るためである。 なお、 このようなローパスフィル夕 3 9の存在 理由から、 その位置は、 必ずしも第 1の減算器 3 5の出力側である必要 はなく 、 第 1 の減算器 3 5の 2つの入力側に第 1 のローパスフィル夕 (図示せず) 、 第 2の口一パスフィル夕 (図示せず) をそれぞれ設ける ような構成としてもよいものである。 However, as in the case of the acceleration described above, in the example using the arithmetic device 30A shown in FIG. 12, from the viewpoint of improving the measurement accuracy, the first subtractor 35 (C 2 'Bruno - C, omega') and (C 2 Bruno - C, () 2 sum is computed of the angular velocity of the values via the mouth one Pasufiru evening 3 9 and the first buffer amplifier 4 0 and is output as Note that, (C 2 Roh one C, Bruno) and. (C 2 Bruno - C, omega ') for determining the sum of the 2, first subtracter 3 The subtraction by 5 is performed by the first g—ω sensor 50 (C 2 w′− C, ω ′) and the second g—ω sensor 51 by (C 2 ω '— C, ω ') 2 because the polarities are opposite to each other, and the operation output signal of the first subtractor 35 is passed to the low-pass filter 39. The reason for this is to remove unnecessary high-frequency components in consideration of the change characteristics of the angular velocity signal and obtain only the frequency components that are originally necessary to know the angular velocity, as described above. Note that, because of the existence of such a low-pass filter 39, the position of the low-pass filter is not necessarily required to be on the output side of the first subtractor 35, but on the two input sides of the first subtractor 35. The first low-pass filter (not shown) and the second mouth-pass filter (not shown) may be provided.
次に、 角加速度の計測について説明する。 Next, measurement of angular acceleration will be described.
例えば、 Z軸を中心とするような角加速度が作用したとすると、 先に 図 1 0を参照しつつ説明したように、 角加速度を知るには、 原則的には, 第 1 の g— ωセンサ 5 0 により得られる ( C 2„ — C ,ノ ) 又は第 2 の g— ωセンサ 5 1 により得られる ( C ノ - C ,„ ) 2のいずれか一 方が得られればよい。 For example, assuming that an angular acceleration acting around the Z axis acts, as described above with reference to FIG. 10, in order to know the angular acceleration, in principle, the first g—ω Either (C 2 „—C,) obtained by the sensor 50 or (C -−C,„) 2 obtained by the second g—ω sensor 51 may be obtained.
しかしながら、 先の加速度や角速度の場合と同様に、 この図 1 2に示 された演算装置 3 0 Αを用いた例においては、 計測精度の向上を図る観 点から、 第 1 の加算器 3 7により、 ( C ,ノ - C , , ' ) と ( C 2 (ノ 一 C ,„ ) 2との和が演算されて、 第 2の緩衝増幅器 4 1 を介して角加速 度の値として出力されるようになっている。 However, as in the case of the acceleration and angular velocity described above, in the example using the arithmetic unit 30 ° shown in FIG. 12, the first adder 37 is used from the viewpoint of improving the measurement accuracy. , The sum of (C, no-C,, ') and (C 2 ( no C, „) 2 is calculated and output as the value of the angular acceleration through the second buffer amplifier 41. It has become so.
次に、 図 1 3を参照しつつ第 2の構成例について説明する。 なお、 図 1 2 に示された構成例における構成要素と同一の構成要素については、 同一の符号を付してその詳細な説明を省略し、 以下、 異なる点を中心に 説明することとする。 Next, a second configuration example will be described with reference to FIGS. The same components as those in the configuration example shown in FIG. 12 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, different points will be mainly described.
この図 1 3に示された構成例においては、 演算装置 3 0 Aは、 図 1 2 に示されたものと何ら変わるところがないものであり、 ここでのその詳 細な説明は省略する。 この第 2の構成例においては、 第 1及び第 2の g — ωセンサ 5 0 A, 5 1 Aの構成が次述するように若干異なるものとな つている点が、 図 1 2に示された構成例と異なるものである。 In the configuration example shown in FIG. 13, the arithmetic unit 30A has no difference from that shown in FIG. 12, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second configuration example, the configurations of the first and second g—ω sensors 50 A and 51 A are slightly different as described below. This point is different from the configuration example shown in FIG.
すなわち、 まず、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 A, 5 1 Aは、 先 の図 2乃至図 4で示された第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 , 5 1 との 対比で言えば、 これら第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 の第 1 の ガラス基板 1 A ( I B) と枠体 4 A ( 4 B ) とが一体に形成された構成 である点が、 先の構成例と異なるものである。 That is, first, the first and second g-ω sensors 50 A and 51 A are the same as the first and second g-ω sensors 50 and 51 shown in FIGS. In contrast, the first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51 have a structure in which the first glass substrate 1 A (IB) and the frame 4 A (4 B) are integrally formed. Is different from the above configuration example.
具体的には、 第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 O Aにおいては、 蓋体 5 5 Aが、 丁度、 先の図 2乃至図 4で示された第 1 のガラス基板 1 Aと枠体 4 Aと を一体形成したものに対応する形状、 寸法となっているものである。 また、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 Aにおいては、 蓋体 5 5 Β力 丁度、 先の図 2乃至図 4で示された第 1 のガラス基板 1 Βと枠体 4 Βとを一体 形成したものに対応する形状、 寸法となっているものである。 Specifically, in the first g-ω sensor 5OA, the lid 55A is just the first glass substrate 1A and the frame 4A shown in FIGS. It has a shape and dimensions corresponding to those integrally formed. Further, in the second g-ω sensor 51 A, the cover 55 is formed with the first glass substrate 1 Β and the frame 4 示 さ shown in FIGS. It has a shape and dimensions corresponding to those that have been set.
さらに、 この構成例においては、 先の取付冶具 4 8 (図 1 2参照) と 第 2のガラス基板 2 Α, 2 Β (図 1 2参照) とが一体形成された構成と なっている。 Further, in this configuration example, the mounting jig 48 (see FIG. 12) and the second glass substrates 2Α and 2Β (see FIG. 12) are integrally formed.
すなわち、 共通基板 5 6は、 絶縁性部材、 例えば、 ガラス部材からな り、 先の図 1 2において示された取付冶具 4 8 とほぼ同様の形状、 寸法 に形成されてなるもので、 しかも、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 における第 2の基板 2 Α, 2 Βを兼ねるものとなっている。 That is, the common substrate 56 is made of an insulating member, for example, a glass member, and is formed in substantially the same shape and dimensions as the mounting jig 48 shown in FIG. The first and second g—ω sensors 50 and 51 also serve as the second substrates 2Α and 2Β.
かかる構成における演算装置 3 0 Αの動作は、 先に図 1 2を参照しつ つ説明したものと同様であるのでここでの説明は省略することとする。 The operation of arithmetic unit 30 # in such a configuration is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 12 and will not be described here.
また、 共通基板 5 6に対する第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 A, 5 1 Αの配設位置は、 図 1 3において、 点線で示されたように、 共通基板 5 6を挟んで反対側の面側であってもよいものである。 Further, the arrangement positions of the first and second g-ω sensors 50 A, 51 に 対 す る with respect to the common substrate 56 are, as shown by the dotted line in FIG. The opposite surface side may be used.
次に、 図 1 4 ( A) 乃至図 1 4 ( C ) を参照しつつ、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 (又は第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 Α, 5 1 A) の他の取り付け例について説明する。 Next, referring to FIGS. 14 (A) to 14 (C), the first and second g-ω sensors 50, 51 (or the first and second g-ω sensors 50) will be described. Α, 5 1A) Another mounting example will be described.
図 1 4 ( A) には、 取付具 (又は共通基板) 5 7が、 図 1 2に示され た配置とは逆の配置となっているものが示されている。 すなわち、 この 図 1 4 ( A) における取付冶具 (又は共通基板) 5 7の配置は、 先の図 1 2に示された取付冶具 4 8を丁度、 Y軸に対して線対称としたものと なっており、 その互いに直交する平面部分 5 7 a, 5 7 bに、 第 1及び 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 (又は第 1 及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 A, 5 1 A) がそれぞれ配設されたものとなっている。 FIG. 14 (A) shows a case where the fixture (or common board) 57 is arranged in the reverse of the arrangement shown in FIG. That is, the arrangement of the mounting jig (or the common board) 57 in FIG. 14 (A) is the same as that of the mounting jig 48 shown in FIG. The first and second g-ω sensors 50, 51 (or the first and second g-ω sensors 50A, 50A, 5 1 A) are provided.
図 1 4 ( B ) には、 丁度、 Tの字のように直交する平面部 5 8 a , 5 8 bを有してなる取付具 (又は共通基板) 5 8を用い、 それぞれの平面 部 5 8 a, 5 8 bへ、 第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0, 5 1 (又は第 1及び第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 0 A, 5 1 A) がそれぞれ配設された例が 示されている。 In FIG. 14 (B), a mounting tool (or common board) 58 having plane portions 58a and 58b orthogonal to each other just like a T is used. Example in which the first and second g-ω sensors 50, 51 (or the first and second g-ω sensors 50A, 51A) are arranged on 8a, 58b respectively It is shown.
図 1 4 ( C ) には、 第 1 の取付冶具 5 9 aに第 1の g— ωセンサ 5 0 (又は 5 0 Α) 力 第 2の取付冶具 5 9 bには、 第 2の g— ωセンサ 5 1 (又は 5 1 A) 力 それぞれ取り付けられた例が示されている。 すな わち、 ここで、 第 1 の取付冶具 5 9 aと第 2の取付冶具 5 9 bとは、 こ れまでの例とは異なり、 別体となっている力 互いに直交するよう配設 されたものである点においては変わることろがないものである。 In Fig. 14 (C), the first mounting jig 59a has a first g—ω sensor 50 (or 50 °) force. The second mounting jig 59b has a second g— An example is shown in which each of the ω sensors 51 (or 51 A) is attached. In other words, here, the first mounting jig 59a and the second mounting jig 59b are different from the previous examples, and are arranged so that separate forces are orthogonal to each other. In that it has been done.
以上、 述べたように、 本発明によれば、 単体で加速度及び角速度を検 出可能な比較的簡素な構成を有してなる同一のセンサ 2つを所定の配置 となるように組み合わせて、 それぞれの出力信号の大小関係を判定する ことで、 複雑な構造を有するセンサを用いることなく加速度、 角速度の みならず角加速度をも知ることができる。 As described above, according to the present invention, two identical sensors each having a relatively simple configuration capable of detecting acceleration and angular velocity by themselves are combined so as to have a predetermined arrangement. By judging the magnitude relationship between the output signals of the sensors, it is possible to know not only acceleration and angular velocity but also angular acceleration without using a sensor having a complicated structure.
また、 本発明によれば、 単体で加速度及び角速度を検出可能な比較的 簡素な構成を有してなる同一のセンサを 2つ組み合わせることで、 簡素 な構成で加速度、 角速度のみならず、 角加速度をも知ることができる新 たな移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサを提供することができる。 Further, according to the present invention, by combining two identical sensors having a relatively simple configuration capable of detecting acceleration and angular velocity by themselves, a simple With a simple configuration, it is possible to provide a new multi-sensor for basic information on a moving object, which can know not only acceleration and angular velocity but also angular acceleration.
移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサを構成する個々のセンサ自体は、 シリ コンを主たる部材としてなるものであるため、 いわゆる半導体製造技術. 特に、 いわゆるマイクロマシング技術を用いての大量生産が可能であり . 安価で比較的簡素な構成を有して、 加速度、 角速度及び角加速度の検出 が可能な移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサを提供することができる。 Since the individual sensors that make up the multi-sensor for basic information on moving objects are made mainly of silicon, they are so-called semiconductor manufacturing technologies. In particular, mass production using so-called micromachining technology is possible. It is possible to provide a multi-sensor for basic information on a moving object, which has an inexpensive and relatively simple configuration and can detect acceleration, angular velocity and angular acceleration.
加速度、 角速度及び角加速度の検出を一箇所で可能とするものである ため、 特に、 設定スペースが小さく限定されている車両にあっては、 加 速度、 角速度及び角加速度のそれぞれについて、 専用のセンサを設ける ような必要がなくなり、 設置スペースの節約が図れるばかりでなく、 車 両の加速度だけでなく、 角速度及び角加速度を車両の種々の制御に提供 することができるため、 より高度な車両の制御が可能となるものである < 次に、 信頼性の向上を図った加速度センサについて図 1 5乃至図 2 1 を参照しつつ説明する。 Since acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration can be detected at one location, dedicated sensors are used for each of acceleration, angular velocity, and angular acceleration, especially in vehicles where the setting space is small and limited. This eliminates the need to provide a vehicle, which not only saves installation space, but also provides not only vehicle acceleration but also angular velocity and angular acceleration for various vehicle controls. <Next, an acceleration sensor with improved reliability will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 21. FIG.
最初に、 図 1 5及び図 1 6を参照しつつ第 1 の構成例について説明す る。 First, the first configuration example will be described with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG.
なお、 説明の都合上、 図 1 5に示されたように、 加速度センサの横方 向 (同図において紙面左右方向) を X軸とし、 加速度センサの縦方向 (同図において紙面上下方向) を Y軸とし、 この X Y軸に直交する方向 の軸を Z軸と定義し、 他の図においてもこれに準するものとする。 また. 図 2 2及び図 2 3に示された従来センサと同一の構成要素については、 同一の符号を用いることとする。 For the sake of explanation, as shown in Fig. 15, the horizontal direction of the acceleration sensor (the horizontal direction in the figure) is the X axis, and the vertical direction of the acceleration sensor (the vertical direction in the figure) is the vertical direction of the acceleration sensor. The Y axis is defined, and the axis in a direction orthogonal to the XY axis is defined as the Z axis, and the same applies to other figures. The same components as those of the conventional sensor shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
まず、 この加速度センサの全体構成を概括的に述べれば、 この加速度 センサ は、 2つの絶縁基板としての第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2の間に、 半導体部材、 例えばシリコンからなる錘体 1 0 3、 枠体 1 0 4等が挟持されるように設けられて、 いわば 3層構造を形成してな るものである (図 1 6参照) 。 そして、 この加速度センサは、 一般に静 電容量型と称され、 検出出力として静電容量が得られるようになつてい るものである。 First, a general description of the overall configuration of this acceleration sensor is as follows. This acceleration sensor has a semiconductor member, for example, silicon, between two first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 as two insulating substrates. Weight consisting of 103, frame 104 and the like are provided so as to be sandwiched therebetween, so to say, a three-layer structure is formed (see FIG. 16). This acceleration sensor is generally called an electrostatic capacitance type, and can obtain an electrostatic capacitance as a detection output.
以下、 具体的にその構成を説明すれば、 まず、 枠体 1 0 4は、 半導体 部材、 例えばシリコンを用いて、 その X Y平面に現れる形状が大凡いわ ゆる枠状に形成されてなるもので、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2の周縁部分に接合されるようになっている (図 1 6参照) 。 The structure will be specifically described below.First, the frame 104 is formed by using a semiconductor member, for example, silicon, and its shape that appears on the XY plane is formed in a substantially frame shape. The first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 are bonded to the peripheral portions (see FIG. 16).
そして、 この枠体 1 0 4の内側には、 錘体 1 0 3力 Y軸方向におい てやや一方の側部へ偏って配設されると共に、 錘体 1 0 3 と枠体 1 0 4 との間に、 第 1乃至第 3の電極接続柱 1 0 5 a〜 1 0 5 cが X軸方向に おいて適宜な間隔を隔てて配設されている (図 1 5参照) 。 Inside the frame 104, the weight 103 is displaced slightly to one side in the Y-axis direction, and the weight 103 and the frame 104. Between them, the first to third electrode connection columns 105a to 105c are arranged at appropriate intervals in the X-axis direction (see FIG. 15).
錘体 1 0 3は、 全体が半導体部材、 例えばシリコンを用いて平板状に 形成されてなるもので、 後述するようにその中央に設けられた中央支持 柱 1 0 6及びトーシヨ ンバー 1 0 7 a, 1 0 7 bを介して第 1及び第 2 のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2の間において、 ト一シヨ ンバー 1 0 7 a, 1 0 7 bを中心にした回動及び変位が可能なように設けられたものとな つている。 この錘体 1 0 3は、 Z軸方向の厚みが、 先の枠体 1 0 4に比 してやや小さく設定されたものとなっており、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基 板 1 0 1, 1 0 2 との間に、 所定の間隙が生ずるようになつている (図 1 6参照) 。 The weight body 103 is formed entirely in a flat plate shape using a semiconductor member, for example, silicon. As will be described later, a central support column 106 and a torsion bar 107 a provided at the center thereof are provided. Between the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 via the first and second glass substrates 107 and 107b via the first and second glass substrates 107b and 107b, respectively. It is provided as follows. The weight body 103 has a thickness in the Z-axis direction set slightly smaller than that of the frame body 104, and the first and second glass substrates 101, 1 There is a predetermined gap between the gap and the gap 0 2 (see Fig. 16).
この錘体 1 0 3の中央には、 中央支持柱 1 0 6及びトーショ ンバー 1 0 7 a , 1 0 7 bが錘体 1 0 3に対して一体に設けられている。 In the center of the weight body 103, a central support column 106 and torsion bars 107a and 107b are provided integrally with the weight body 103.
すなわち、 錘体 1 0 3の中央には、 中央支持柱 1 0 6及びト一シヨン バー 1 0 7 a, 1 0 7 bを設けるために、 適宜な大きさの中央貫通孔 1 0 8が穿設されており、 この中央貫通孔 1 0 8の略中央に、 中央支持柱 1 0 6が設けられている (図 1 5及び図 1 6参照) 。 この中央支持柱 1 0 6は、 Z軸方向の厚みが、 先の枠体 1 0 4のそれと同一に設定された ものとなっており、 Z軸方向の両端面は、 それぞれ第 1及び第 2のガラ ス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2に、 例えば、 いわゆる陽極接合法を用いて接合さ れるようになっている (図 1 6参照) 。 That is, in the center of the weight body 103, a central through-hole 108 having an appropriate size is formed in order to provide the center support column 106 and the torsion bars 107a and 107b. A central support column is provided at approximately the center of the central through hole 108. 106 is provided (see FIGS. 15 and 16). The thickness of the center support column 106 in the Z-axis direction is set to be the same as that of the frame body 104, and both end surfaces in the Z-axis direction are the first and second ends, respectively. The glass substrates 101 and 102 are bonded by, for example, a so-called anodic bonding method (see FIG. 16).
中央支持柱 1 0 6は、 XY平面の形状が、 大凡十字状であって、 特に, Y軸方向が X軸方向に比して長めに設定されたものとなっている (図 1 5参照) 。 The center support column 106 has a roughly cruciform shape in the XY plane, and in particular, the Y-axis direction is set longer than the X-axis direction (see Fig. 15) .
そして、 中央支持柱 1 0 6の Y軸方向で対向する一組の側面部分から ト一シヨンバー 1 0 7 a, 1 0 7 bが延設されて、 その端部が錘体 1 0 3に接合されており (図 1 5参照) 、 中央支持柱 1 0 6及びト一シヨ ン バー 1 0 7 a , 1 0 7 bは、 錘体 1 0 3 と一体形成されるようになって いるものである。 Then, the torsion bars 107 a and 107 b extend from a pair of side surfaces of the central support column 106 facing each other in the Y-axis direction, and the ends thereof are joined to the weight body 103. (See Fig. 15), and the central support column 106 and the torsion bars 107 a and 107 b are formed integrally with the weight 103. is there.
卜一シヨ ンバー 1 0 7 a , 1 0 7 bは、 その X Z平面における断面形 状が、 矩形状に形成されてなるもので、 より具体的には、 このト一ショ ンバ一 1 0 7 a , 1 0 7 bは、 Z軸方向の長さに比して X軸方向が細幅 に設定されたものとなっている。 また、 トーシヨ ンバー 1 0 7 a , 1 0 7 bは、 Z軸方向の長さが、 錘体 1 0 3の Z軸方向の厚みと同一となつ ている (図 1 6参照) 。 Each of the transmission bars 107 a and 107 b has a rectangular cross-section on the XZ plane. More specifically, the transmission bars 107 a , 107 b have a smaller width in the X-axis direction than the length in the Z-axis direction. The length of the torsion bars 107a and 107b in the Z-axis direction is the same as the thickness of the weight body 103 in the Z-axis direction (see FIG. 16).
また、 この 卜ーシヨ ンバー 1 0 7 a, 1 0 7 bの両端部は、 中央貫通 孔 1 0 8の内壁に接合されるようにして錘体 1 0 3と一体となっており . このような構造によって、 錘体 1 0 3は、 ト一シヨ ンバー 1 0 7 a , 1 0 7 bを中心に回動及び Z軸方向での変位が可能とされている。 Also, both ends of the torsion bars 107a and 107b are integrated with the weight body 103 so as to be joined to the inner wall of the central through hole 108. Due to the structure, the weight 103 can rotate around the torsion bars 107a and 107b and can be displaced in the Z-axis direction.
さらに、 錘体 1 0 3には、 先の中央貫通孔 1 0 8の周囲に、 その XY 平面形状が矩形状の 4つの副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 dが穿設されてい る。 すなわち、 この第 1の構成例においては、 中央貫通孔 1 0 8の一方 の脇に、 2つの副貫通孔 1 0 9 a, 1 0 9 bが Y軸方向で適宜な間隔を 隔てて設けられ、 また、 中央貫通孔 1 0 8の他方の脇に、 2つの副貫通 孔 1 0 9 c , 1 0 9 dが同様に Y軸方向で適宜な間隔を隔てて設けられ ている (図 1 5参照) 。 Further, in the weight body 103, four sub-through holes 1109a to 1109d whose XY plane shape is rectangular are formed around the center through hole 1108. . That is, in the first configuration example, one of the central through holes 108 The two sub-through holes 1109a and 109b are provided at appropriate intervals in the Y-axis direction beside the center through hole. Holes 109c and 109d are similarly provided at appropriate intervals in the Y-axis direction (see FIG. 15).
そして、 各々の副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 d内においては、 半導体部 材、 例えばシリコンを用いて角柱状に形成されてなる副支持柱 1 1 0 a 〜 1 1 0 dが、 副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 dの内壁と適宜な間隙を介し て配設されている (図 1 5及び図 1 6参照) 。 すなわち、 副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 l 1 0 dは、 副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 l 0 9 dに遊貫されたものとな つている。 Then, in each of the sub through holes 1 09 a to 1 09 d, a semiconductor member, for example, a sub support column 110 a to 110 d formed in a prismatic shape using silicon, It is arranged with an appropriate gap between the inner walls of the sub through holes 109 a to 109 d (see FIGS. 15 and 16). That is, the sub-support columns 110a to 110d are loosely penetrated into the sub-through holes 109a to 109d.
この副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 l 1 0 dは、 その Z軸方向の長さが先の枠体 1 0 4のそれと同一に設定されてなるもので、 Z軸方向の両端面は、 そ れぞれ第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2に接合されたものとな つている。 The sub-support columns 110 a to 110 d have the same length in the Z-axis direction as that of the frame 104, and both end faces in the Z-axis direction are These are joined to the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102, respectively.
第 1乃至第 3の電極接続柱 1 0 5 a〜 1 0 5 cは、 第 1及び第 2のガ ラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2に配設された電極 (図示せず) と外部との接続 のために設けられたもので、 半導体部材、 例えばシリコンを用いて柱状 に形成されてなるものである。 これら、 第 1乃至第 3の電極接続柱 1 0 5 a〜 l 0 5 cの Z軸方向の長さは、 先の枠体 1 0 4のそれと同一に設 定されたものとなっている。 The first to third electrode connection pillars 105 a to 105 c are connected to electrodes (not shown) disposed on the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 and to the outside. This is provided for connection of the semiconductor device, and is formed in a columnar shape using a semiconductor member, for example, silicon. The length of the first to third electrode connection columns 105 a to 105 c in the Z-axis direction is set to be the same as that of the frame 104 described above.
一方、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2には、 先の錘体 1 0 3の平面部分と対向する適宜な大きさの電極 (図示せず) カ^ それぞれ 少なく とも一つづつ配設されており、 それぞれ錘体 1 0 3との間で、 い わゆる平行板コンデンサが形成されるようにしてある。 なお、 これら電 極においては、 先の副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 dに対向する部位は、 副 貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 l 0 9 dの XY平面形状と同様な形状に切り欠いてお くのが好適である。 On the other hand, the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 each have at least one electrode (not shown) of an appropriate size facing the flat portion of the weight body 103. The so-called parallel plate capacitors are formed between each of them and the weight 103. In these electrodes, the portion facing the sub-through-holes 109a to 109d was cut into a shape similar to the XY plane shape of the sub-through-holes 109a to 109d. Lack Is preferred.
これらの電極は、 例えば、 先の第 1及び第 2の電極接続柱 1 0 5 a, 1 0 5 bの端面に接続されるようになっている。 そして、 例えば第 1の ガラス基板 1 0 1 には、 第 1乃至第 3の電極接続柱 1 0 5 a〜 1 0 5 c の端面に臨む位置に、 ?し (図示せず) が穿設されており、 この孔には、 金属材が充填されて、 それぞれ第 1乃至第 3の電極接続柱 1 0 5 a〜 1 0 5 c と電気的に導通するようになっている。 この金属材充填の際には. 図示されないリード線が、 一部外部へ出るようにして埋設されるように なっており、 このリード線を介して、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2 に配設された電極が外部の回路へ接続可能とされて、 錘体 1 0 3 との静電容量が出力可能とされている。 These electrodes are connected to, for example, the end faces of the first and second electrode connection columns 105a and 105b. Then, for example, on the first glass substrate 101, at the position facing the end face of the first to third electrode connection columns 105a to 105c,? (Not shown) are drilled, and the holes are filled with a metal material, and are electrically connected to the first to third electrode connection columns 105a to 105c, respectively. It has become. At the time of filling the metal material, lead wires (not shown) are embedded so as to be partially exposed to the outside, and the first and second glass substrates 101 are inserted through the lead wires. , 102 can be connected to an external circuit, and the capacitance with the weight 103 can be output.
上述した構成の加速度センサを製造する場合、 その製造工程において. 特に、 枠体 1 0 4、 中央支持柱 1 0 6、 副支持柱 1 1 0 &〜 1 1 0 €1並 びに第 1乃至第 3の電極接続柱 1 0 5 a〜 1 0 5 c と、 第 1及び第 2の ガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2 との接合は、 例えば、 公知 · 周知のいわゆる 陽極接合法を用いるのが好適である。 この陽極接合法は、 概略的に言え ば、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2を所定の高温に熱した状 態において、 所定の負の電圧を印加する一方、 錘体 1 0 3等をなすシリ コン部材を接地又は所定の電圧に保持することで、 両者の界面に作用す るいわゆる静電力を利用して接合を行わしめるものである。 In the case of manufacturing the acceleration sensor having the above-described configuration, in the manufacturing process. In particular, the frame 104, the center support column 106, the sub support column 110 and ~ 110 € 1 and the first to the first The three electrode connection pillars 105 a to 105 c and the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 are joined by, for example, a known / well-known anodic bonding method. It is suitable. In this anodic bonding method, roughly speaking, in a state where the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 are heated to a predetermined high temperature, while applying a predetermined negative voltage, By holding the silicon member forming 103 or the like at ground or at a predetermined voltage, bonding is performed using a so-called electrostatic force acting on the interface between the two.
また、 中央貫通孔 1 0 8や副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 dの形成、 中央 支持柱 1 0 6や卜一ショ ンバ一 1 0 7 a , 1 0 7 bさらに、 副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 1 1 0 d等の形成には、 例えば、 ドライエッチングが好適であ る。 なお、 ウエッ トエッチングを用いて中央支持柱 1 0 6や副支持柱 1 1 0 &〜 1 1 0 を形成する場合には、 ( 1 1 0 ) 面を有するシリコン ウェハを用いれば、 垂直な側壁を有した柱を得ることができるが、 柱の 短手軸方向の断面 (例えば、 図 1 5における X Y平面における形状) は, 菱形となる。 In addition, the formation of the central through hole 108 and the sub through holes 109 a to 109 d, the central support column 106 and the torsion bar 107 a and 107 b, and the sub support column For example, dry etching is suitable for forming 110a to 110d and the like. When the central support column 106 and the sub support columns 110 & 110 are formed by wet etching, a vertical side wall can be formed by using a silicon wafer having a (110) plane. You can get a pillar with The cross section in the short axis direction (for example, the shape in the XY plane in Fig. 15) is a rhombus.
かかる構成において、 例えば、 加速度が Z軸方向で作用したとする。 錘体 1 0 3は、 慣性力により、 加速度が作用したとは反対の方向に変 位し、 錘体 1 0 3が近接した側に位置する第 1 又は第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2の電極 (図示せず) と錘体 1 0 3 との間の静電容量は、 錘 体 1 0 3の変位量、 すなわち加速度の大きさに応じて増加する一方、 反 対側に位置する電極 (図示せず) と錘体 1 0 3 との間の静電容量は、 錘 体 1 0 3の変位量、 すなわち加速度の大きさに応じて減少することとな る。 したがって、 それぞれの静電容量を、 図示されない外部の回路にお いて検出し、 その差を得ることで加速度の大きさを知ることができ、 ま た、 それぞれの静電容量の大小関係により、 加速度が何れの方向に作用 したかを判定することが可能となる。 In such a configuration, for example, it is assumed that acceleration acts in the Z-axis direction. The weight 103 is displaced by the inertial force in a direction opposite to the direction in which the acceleration was applied, and the first or second glass substrate 101, 1 located on the side where the weight 103 is located close to. The capacitance between the electrode 102 (not shown) and the weight 103 is increased in accordance with the displacement of the weight 103, that is, the magnitude of the acceleration, while the capacitance is located on the opposite side. The capacitance between the rotating electrode (not shown) and the weight 103 decreases in accordance with the amount of displacement of the weight 103, that is, the magnitude of the acceleration. Therefore, each capacitance is detected by an external circuit (not shown), and the magnitude of the acceleration can be obtained by obtaining the difference between the capacitances. It is possible to determine in which direction has been applied.
それ故、 錘体 1 0 3 と、 電極が配設された第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2 との間隔は、 極力一定に保持されること力 出力特性の 安定した信頼性のある加速度センサを提供するために必要とされるが、 従来の加速度センサにおいては、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2 に接合されるのは、 枠体 1 0 4と中央支持柱 1 0 6並びに第 1乃至 第 3の電極接続柱 1 0 5 a〜 l 0 5 cのみであった。 Therefore, the distance between the weight body 103 and the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 on which the electrodes are arranged is kept as constant as possible. Although it is required to provide a flexible acceleration sensor, in the conventional acceleration sensor, the frame body 104 is bonded to the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102. And only the center support column 106 and the first to third electrode connection columns 105 a to 105 c.
そのため、 これら枠体 1 0 4と中央支持柱 1 0 6並びに第 1乃至第 3 の電極接続柱 1 0 5 a〜 l 0 5 c と、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2 とが公知 · 周知のいわゆる陽極接合により接合された後、 接合時 の高温の状態から室温に戻された状態となると、 ガラスとシリコンとの 熱膨張係数の違いに起因して、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2の特に枠体 1 0 4と中央支持柱 1 0 6に接合されていない部位が歪み を生じ易かった。 すなわち、 例えば図 2 3に示されたように、 第 1及び 第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2は、 外側に凸状に変形し、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2 と綞体 1 0 3 との間隔、 ひいては電極と 錘体 1 0 3 との間隔が所望の値とならないという不都合を生ずるもので あった。 Therefore, the frame 104, the central support column 106, the first to third electrode connection columns 105 a to 105 c, and the first and second glass substrates 101, 100 After joining by well-known anodic bonding, when the temperature is returned from the high temperature state at the time of joining to room temperature, the first and the second are caused by the difference in the coefficient of thermal expansion between glass and silicon. The portions of the second glass substrates 101 and 102, particularly those not joined to the frame 104 and the center support column 106, were liable to be distorted. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. The second glass substrates 101, 102 are deformed outwardly convexly, and the distance between the first and second glass substrates 101, 102 and the solid body 103, and thus the electrodes There was a problem that the distance from the weight 103 was not the desired value.
これに対して、 本発明の実施の形態における加速度センサにおいては. 先の副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 l 1 0 dが設けられてあるため、 いわゆる陽極 接合法による接合処理が終了し、 接合処理の際に高温に晒された部位が 室温に戻り、 ガラスとシリコンとの熱膨張係数の違いに起因して、 第 1 及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2が変形しょうとしても、 副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 l 1 0 dによりそのような変形が極力抑えられ、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2 と、 錘体 1 0 3の間隔が略所望の大きさ に保持されることとなる。 On the other hand, in the acceleration sensor according to the embodiment of the present invention. Since the sub-support columns 110a to 110d are provided, the bonding process by the so-called anodic bonding method is completed. The part exposed to high temperature during processing returns to room temperature, and the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 are deformed due to the difference in the thermal expansion coefficient between glass and silicon. Such deformation is suppressed as much as possible by the auxiliary support pillars 110a to 110d, and the distance between the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 and the weight body 103 is substantially desired. It will be kept at the size of.
また、 この加速度センサに、 外部から通常とは異なる何らかの過度の 衝撃が加わり、 例えば、 錘体 1 0 3が X軸方向に変位するような場合、 従来とは異なり、 副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 l 1 0 dにより X軸方向での錘体 1 0 3の動きが制限されるため、 錘体 1 0 3が必要以上に動いて枠体 1 0 4に激突し、 破損するようなことが防止されるようになつている。 次に、 第 2の構成例について、 図 1 7 を参照しつつ説明する。 Also, if any unusual excessive impact is applied to this acceleration sensor from the outside, for example, when the weight body 103 is displaced in the X-axis direction, unlike the conventional case, the auxiliary support column 110a The movement of the weight 103 in the X-axis direction is restricted by ~ l10d, so that the weight 103 may move more than necessary and crash into the frame 104, causing damage. Is to be prevented. Next, a second configuration example will be described with reference to FIG.
なお、 図 1 5及び図 1 6に示された第 1 の構成例と同一の構成要素に ついては、 同一符号を付してその詳細な説明を省略し、 以下、 異なる点 を中心に説明することとする。 The same components as those in the first configuration example shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, different points will be mainly described. And
この第 2の構成例は、 先に図 1 5及び図 1 6において示された第 1の 構成例における副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 d及び副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 1 1 0 dの形状を違えたもので、 その配置は、 基本的に第 1の構成例と同 一のものである。 The second configuration example includes the sub through-holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub support columns 110 a to 110 d in the first configuration example previously shown in FIGS. 15 and 16. The shape of 0d is different, and its arrangement is basically the same as that of the first configuration example.
すなわち、 第 2の構成例における副貫通孔 1 1 1 a〜 1 1 1 dは、 そ の内壁面が円筒状となるように錘体 1 0 3 Aに穿設されており、 各々の 副貫通孔 1 1 1 a〜 ; L 1 1 d内に、 副支持柱 1 1 2 a〜 1 1 2 dが配設 されている。 That is, the sub through holes 11 1 a to 11 d in the second configuration example are Are drilled in the weight body 103A so that the inner wall surface of the body is cylindrical, and each of the sub-through holes 1 1 1a-; 1 2 d is provided.
副支持柱 1 1 2 a〜 1 1 2 dは、 半導体部材、 例えばシリコンを用い て円柱状に形成されてなるもので、 それぞれの端面は、 それぞれ第 1及 び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2に接合されたものとなっている。 なお、 この副支持柱 1 1 2 a〜 1 1 2 dの機能については、 上述した 第 1 の構成例と変わるところがないので、 その詳細な説明は省略する。 次に、 第 3の構成例について、 図 1 8を参照しつつ説明する。 The sub-support columns 112 a to 112 d are formed in a cylindrical shape using a semiconductor member, for example, silicon, and each end face is formed of a first and a second glass substrate 110 1, respectively. , 102. Note that the functions of the sub-support columns 112a to 112d are the same as those of the first configuration example described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. Next, a third configuration example will be described with reference to FIG.
なお、 図 1 5及び図 1 6に示された第 1 の構成例と同一の構成要素に ついては、 同一符号を付してその詳細な説明を省略し、 以下、 異なる点 を中心に説明することとする。 The same components as those in the first configuration example shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, different points will be mainly described. And
この第 3の構成例は、 先に図 1 5及び図 1 6において示された第 1 の 構成例における副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 d及び副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 1 1 0 dの数を違えたものである。 The third configuration example is different from the first configuration example shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 in that the sub through holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub support columns 110 a to 110 d 0d is a different number.
すなわち、 この第 3の構成例においては、 X Y平面形状が矩形状の 6 つの副貫通孔 1 1 3 a ~ 1 1 3 f が錘体 1 0 3 Bに穿設されている。 That is, in the third configuration example, six sub through holes 113 a to 113 f each having a rectangular XY plane shape are formed in the weight body 103 B.
これら 6つの副貫通孔 1 1 3 a〜 l 1 3 f は、 中央貫通孔 1 0 8の一 方の脇に 3つの副貫通孔 1 1 3 a〜 1 1 3 c力 Y軸方向で適宜な間隔 を隔てて設けられ、 中央貫通孔 1 0 8の他方の脇に 3つの副貫通孔 1 1 These six sub-through holes 1 13 a to l 13 f have three sub-through holes 1 13 a to 1 13 c at the side of the central through hole 108, which is appropriate in the Y-axis direction. Three sub-through holes 1 1 are provided at an interval, and are located on the other side of the center through hole 108.
3 d〜 1 1 3 f 力 同様に Υ軸方向で適宜な間隔を隔てて設けられたも のとなつている。 3 d ~ 1 1 3 f Force Similarly, they are provided at appropriate intervals in the Υ-axis direction.
そして、 これら副貫通孔 1 1 3 a〜 1 1 3 f の内側に、 副支持柱 1 1 Then, inside the sub through holes 1 1 3a to 1 1 3f, the sub support columns 1 1
4 a〜 l 1 4 f がそれぞれ配設されて、 その Z軸方向の端面が第 1及び 第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2 とそれぞれ接合されている。 4 a to l 14 f are provided, respectively, and their end faces in the Z-axis direction are joined to the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102, respectively.
かかる構成において、 副支持柱 1 1 4 a〜 1 1 4 f の基本的な機能は 第 1 の構成例と基本的に変わることろがないが、 副支持柱 1 1 4 a〜 1In such a configuration, the basic functions of the sub-support columns 1 14 a to 1 14 f are as follows: There is basically no difference from the first configuration example, but the sub-support columns 1 1 4 a to 1
1 4 f が第 1 の構成例よりも多く配設されたことに伴い、 第 1及び第 2 のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2の変形が第 1 の構成例に比してより抑圧さ れるものとなる。 With the increased number of 14 f than in the first configuration example, the deformation of the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 is suppressed more than in the first configuration example. It will be.
次に、 第 4の構成例について、 図 1 9を参照しつつ説明する。 Next, a fourth configuration example will be described with reference to FIG.
なお、 図 1 5及び図 1 6に示された第 1 の構成例と同一の構成要素に ついては、 同一符号を付してその詳細な説明を省略し、 以下、 異なる点 を中心に説明することとする。 The same components as those in the first configuration example shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, different points will be mainly described. And
この第 4の構成例は、 先に図 1 5及び図 1 6において示された第 1の 構成例における副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 d及び副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 1 1 0 dの形状を違えたものである。 The fourth configuration example includes the sub-through holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub-support columns 110 a to 110 in the first configuration example previously shown in FIGS. 15 and 16. The shape of 0 d is different.
すなわち、 まず、 この第 4の構成例における副貫通孔 1 1 5 a〜 1 1 5 dは、 その X Y平面における形状が、 いわゆる L字状に形成されて、 錘体 1 0 3 Cに穿設されている。 そして、 副支持柱 1 1 6 a〜 l 1 6 d も、 その X Y平面の形状が副貫通孔 1 1 5 a〜 1 1 5 d と同様にいわゆ る L字状に形成されて、 副貫通孔 1 1 5 a〜 1 1 5 d内に、 副貫通孔 1 That is, first, the sub through-holes 115a to 115d in the fourth configuration example have a so-called L-shape in the XY plane, and are formed in the weight 103C. Have been. The sub-support columns 1 16 a to l 16 d are also formed in the so-called L-shape in the XY plane in the same manner as the sub-through holes 1 15 a to 1 15 d. Hole 1 1 5 a ~ 1 1 5 d
1 5 a〜 l 1 5 dの内壁と適宜な間隔を隔てて配設されている。 It is disposed at an appropriate distance from the inner wall of 15a to 15d.
この第 4の構成例における副支持柱 1 1 6 a〜 l 1 6 dの基本的な機 能は、 先の第 1の構成例と同一であるが、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2 と接合される端面の形状を、 いわゆる L字状としたことで 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2 と接合される面積が、 第 1の 構成例の副支持柱 1 1 6 a〜 1 1 6 dに比して大となり、 そのため、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2の変形がより効果的に抑圧され ることとなるものである。 The basic functions of the sub-support columns 1 16 a to l 16 d in the fourth configuration example are the same as those in the first configuration example, but the first and second glass substrates 10 16 By making the shape of the end face to be joined to the first and second substrates into a so-called L-shape, the area to be joined to the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 becomes smaller than that of the first configuration example. Sub support pillars 1 16 a to 1 16 d Larger than that, so that the deformation of the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 is more effectively suppressed It is.
次に、 第 5の構成例について、 図 2 0を参照しつつ説明する。 Next, a fifth configuration example will be described with reference to FIG.
なお、 図 1 5及び図 1 6に示された第 1の構成例と同一の構成要素に ついては、 同一符号を付してその詳細な説明を省略し、 以下、 異なる点 を中心に説明することとする。 The same components as those in the first configuration example shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 are used. The same reference numerals are given and the detailed description is omitted, and different points will be mainly described below.
この第 5の構成例は、 先に図 1 5及び図 1 6において示された第 1の 構成例における副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 d及び副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 1 1 0 dの形状を違えたものである。 The fifth configuration example is different from the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 in that the sub through-holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub support columns 110 a to 110 d are provided. The shape of 0 d is different.
すなわち、 この第 5の構成例における副貫通孔 1 1 7 a〜 1 1 7 dは, その XY平面における形状が、 円弧状に形成されたもので、 中央貫通孔 1 0 8の一方の脇に、 副貫通孔 1 1 7 a , 1 1 7 bが Y軸方向で適宜な 間隔を隔てて設けられ、 中央貫通孔 1 0 8の他方の脇に、 副貫通孔 1 1 7 c , 1 1 7 dが Y軸方向で適宜な間隔を隔てて設けられている。 That is, the sub through-holes 117 a to 117 d in the fifth configuration example are formed in an arc shape on the XY plane, and are provided on one side of the central through hole 108. The sub through holes 1 17 a and 1 17 b are provided at appropriate intervals in the Y-axis direction, and the sub through holes 1 17 c and 1 17 are provided on the other side of the central through hole 108. d are provided at appropriate intervals in the Y-axis direction.
そして、 副支持柱 1 1 8 ≤1〜 1 1 8 (1は、 その 2軸方向の両端面が上 述の副貫通孔 1 1 7 a〜 1 1 7 dと同様に、 X Y平面における形状が円 弧状となるように形成されて、 副貫通孔 1 1 7 a〜 1 1 7 dの内壁と適 宜な間隔を隔てて設けられたものとなっている。 The sub-support column 1 1 8 ≤ 1 to 1 1 8 (1 has a shape in the XY plane whose end faces in the two axial directions are the same as the above-described sub-through holes 1 17 a to 1 17 d. It is formed in an arc shape, and is provided at an appropriate distance from the inner wall of the sub through-holes 117a to 117d.
この第 5の構成例も先の第 4の構成例と同様に、 副支持柱 1 1 8 a〜 1 1 8 dのそれぞれの Z軸方向の端面の面積が、 第 1の構成例の場合と 比較して大きく設定されるため、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2の変形がより効果的に抑圧されることとなるものである。 In the fifth configuration example, similarly to the fourth configuration example, the area of the end surface in the Z-axis direction of each of the sub-support columns 1 18 a to 1 18 d is different from that of the first configuration example. Since it is set to be relatively large, the deformation of the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 is more effectively suppressed.
最後に、 第 6の構成例について、 図 2 1を参照しつつ説明する。 Finally, a sixth configuration example will be described with reference to FIG.
なお、 図 1 5及び図 1 6に示された第 1の構成例と同一の構成要素に ついては、 同一符号を付してその詳細な説明を省略し、 以下、 異なる点 を中心に説明することとする。 The same components as those in the first configuration example shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, different points will be mainly described. And
この第 6の構成例は、 先に図 1 5及び図 1 6において示された第 1の 構成例における副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 d及び副支持柱 1 1 0 a〜 1 1 0 dの形状を違えたものである。 The sixth configuration example is the same as the sub-through-holes 109 a to 109 d and the sub-support columns 110 a to 110 in the first configuration example previously shown in FIGS. The shape of 0 d is different.
すなわち、 この第 6の構成例における副貫通孔 1 1 9 a〜 1 1 9 dは. その XY平面における形状が、 長方形状に形成されたもので、 しかも、 その長手軸が、 錘体 1 0 3 Εの中心から外方へ延びる放射状の直線を想 定した場合にこの直線に沿うようにして、 中央貫通孔 1 0 8を挟んで、 その両側にそれぞれ 2つづつ設けられたものとなっている。 That is, the sub through holes 1 19 a to 1 19 d in this sixth configuration example. If the shape in the XY plane is formed in a rectangular shape, and its longitudinal axis is supposed to be a radial straight line extending outward from the center of the weight 103 mm, it will follow this straight line. Then, two each are provided on both sides of the central through hole 108.
そして、 副支持柱 1 2 0 a〜 1 2 0 dは、 その Z軸方向の両端面が上 述の副貫通孔 1 1 9 a〜 1 1 9 dと同様に、 XY平面における形状が長 方形となるように形成されて、 副貫通孔 1 1 9 a〜 1 1 9 dの内壁と適 宜な間隔を隔てて設けられたものとなっている。 The sub-supporting columns 120a to 120d have a rectangular shape in the XY plane at both end surfaces in the Z-axis direction in the same manner as the above-described sub-through holes 1 19a to 119d. And provided at an appropriate distance from the inner walls of the sub through-holes 119 a to 119 d.
この第 6の構成例も先の第 4の構成例と同様に、 副支持柱 1 2 0 a〜 1 2 0 dのそれぞれの Z軸方向の端面の面積が、 第 1 の構成例の場合と 比較して大きく設定されるため、 第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1 , 1 0 2の変形がより効果的に抑圧されることとなるものである。 In the sixth configuration example, similarly to the fourth configuration example, the area of the end surface in the Z-axis direction of each of the sub-support columns 120a to 120d is the same as that of the first configuration example. Since it is set to be relatively large, the deformation of the first and second glass substrates 101 and 102 is more effectively suppressed.
なお、 上述の説明においては、 トーシヨ ンバ一 1 0 7 a , 1 0 7 bが. いわば両端支持梁として錘体 1 0 3を支持するものを前提としたが、 錘 体 1 0 3の支持は、 このような両端支持梁に限定される必要はなく、 例 えば、 片持はりによるものであってもよいものである。 In the above description, the torsion chambers 107 a and 107 b are assumed to support the weight body 103 as a support beam at both ends. In other words, the weight body 103 is not supported. However, it is not necessary to be limited to such a both-end supporting beam, and for example, a cantilever beam may be used.
また、 いずれの構成例においても共通することである力 、 副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 d, l l l a〜 l l l d, 1 1 3 a〜 1 1 3 d , 1 1 5 a〜 1 1 5 d, 1 1 7 a〜 1 1 7 d, 1 1 9 a〜 1 1 9 dを設けたこと により、 空気の粘性による錘体 1 0 3, 1 0 3 A, 1 0 3 B , 1 0 3 C ; 1 0 3 D, 1 0 3 Eに対するダンピング (スクイーズ効果) が低減され 高い周波数における応答性が向上されることとなる。 すなわち、 これは 錘体 1 0 3 , 1 0 3 A, 1 0 3 B, 1 0 3 C , 1 0 3 D, 1 0 3 Eと第 1及び第 2のガラス基板 1 0 1, 1 0 2 との間隔は、 精々 1 0 m程度 の大きさであるため、 仮に、 副貫通孔 1 0 9 a〜 1 0 9 d, 1 1 1 a〜 1 1 1 d , 1 1 3 a〜 1 1 3 d, 1 1 5 a〜 1 1 5 d, 1 1 7 a〜 1 1 7 d, 1 1 9 a〜 1 1 9 dがないと、 この隙間の空気の粘性によって、 錘体 1 0 3, 1 0 3 A, 1 0 3 B , 1 0 3 C , 1 0 3 D, 1 0 3 Eの動 きが抑制され、 高い周波数での応答性が劣化するが、 副貫通孔 1 0 9 a 〜 1 0 9 d, l l l a〜 l l l d, 1 1 3 a〜 1 1 3 d , 1 1 5 a〜 1 1 5 d, 1 1 7 a〜 1 1 7 d , 1 1 9 a〜 1 1 9 dが設けられたことで, 空気の流れが生じるためである。 In addition, the forces, common through-holes 109 a to 109 d, llla to llld, 113 a to 113 d, and 115 a to 115 that are common to all the configuration examples With the provision of d, 117 a-1 117 d, and 119 a-119 d, the weights 103, 103 A, 103 B, 103 due to the viscosity of air are provided. C : The damping (squeezing effect) for 103D and 103E is reduced, and the response at high frequencies is improved. That is, this corresponds to the weights 103, 103A, 103B, 103C, 103D, 103E and the first and second glass substrates 101, 102. Since the distance between them is at most about 10 m, it is assumed that the auxiliary through-holes 109 a to 109 d, 111 a to 111 d, and 113 a to 113 d, 1 15 a to 1 15 d, 1 17 a to 1 1 Without 7 d, 1 19 a to 1 19 d, the viscosity of the air in this gap causes the weights 103, 103 A, 103 B, 103 C, 103 D, The movement of 103E is suppressed, and the response at high frequency is degraded. However, the sub-through holes 109a to 109d, llla to llld, and 113a to 113d, 1 This is because air flow is generated due to the provision of 15a to 115d, 117a to 117d, and 119a to 119d.
なお、 図 1 5乃至図 2 1で説明したような副支持柱 1 1 0 a及び副貫 通孔 1 0 9 a等を設けるような構造を、 先に図 2乃至図 4に示された移 動体基礎情報用マルチセンサに適用してもよく、 移動体で用いるセンサ としてより信頼性が向上したものとなる。 The structure in which the sub support column 110a and the sub through hole 109a as described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 21 are provided is similar to the structure shown in FIGS. The present invention may be applied to a multi-sensor for basic information of a moving object, and has improved reliability as a sensor used for a moving object.
以上、 述べたように、 図 1 5乃至図 2 1 を用いて説明した発明によれ ば、 2つの絶縁基板の間に、 双方に接合される支持柱を複数設けるよう にしたので、 2つの絶縁基板が、 双方に接合された複数の支持柱を介し て対向するため、 従来と異なり、 製造後に 2つの絶縁基板が撓むような 歪みが抑圧され、 2つの絶縁基板の間隔が変化することがなく、 そのた め、 錘体と 2つの絶縁基板に配設された電極との間隔も一定に保持され て、 所望の出力特性が得られ、 信頼性の高い加速度センサを提供するこ とができる。 As described above, according to the invention described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 21, a plurality of support pillars joined to both insulating substrates are provided between two insulating substrates. Since the substrates face each other via a plurality of support pillars bonded to each other, unlike conventional products, the distortion that the two insulating substrates bend after production is suppressed, and the distance between the two insulating substrates does not change Therefore, the distance between the weight and the electrodes provided on the two insulating substrates is also kept constant, and desired output characteristics can be obtained, and a highly reliable acceleration sensor can be provided.
また、 外部から過度の衝撃が加わった場合にあって、 錘体が、 複数の 支持柱の軸方向と略直交するような方向へ触れるような場合にあっても. 複数の支持柱がいわゆるス トツバの機能を果たすため、 従来と異なり、 大きく横振れして枠体へ衝突し破損するようなことがなく、 堅牢な加速 度センサを提供することができる。 Also, even when the external body receives an excessive impact and the weight touches in a direction substantially perpendicular to the axial direction of the plurality of support columns. Since it fulfills the function of the tongue, unlike the conventional one, it is possible to provide a robust acceleration sensor without a large lateral swing and colliding with the frame and being damaged.
さらに、 副貫通孔により空気の粘性による錘体に対するダンピング (スクイーズ効果) が抑圧され、 高い周波数での応答性の向上が図られ るという効果を奏するものである。 産業上の利用可能性 In addition, damping (squeezing effect) on the weight due to the viscosity of air is suppressed by the sub-through holes, and the response at high frequencies is improved. Industrial applicability
以上のように、 本発明に係る移動体基礎情報用マルチセンサは、 車両 等の移動体において、 その動作制御等のため加速度、 角速度等の情報が 必要な場合にこれらの情報を取得するセンサとして用いるのに適し、 ま た、 加速度センサは、 特に、 構造の信頼性の向上を図ったものであるた め、 車両等において用いるのにより好適なものである。 As described above, the multi-sensor for mobile object basic information according to the present invention is used as a sensor for acquiring information such as acceleration, angular velocity, and the like when the information such as acceleration or angular velocity is required for operation control or the like in a mobile object such as a vehicle. The acceleration sensor is more suitable for use in a vehicle or the like, because the acceleration sensor is designed to improve the reliability of the structure.
Claims
Applications Claiming Priority (6)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP10/196519 | 1998-06-29 | ||
| JP19651998 | 1998-06-29 | ||
| JP10196520A JP2000019198A (en) | 1998-06-29 | 1998-06-29 | Acceleration sensor |
| JP10/196520 | 1998-06-29 | ||
| JP11/45706 | 1999-02-24 | ||
| JP11045706A JP2000081448A (en) | 1998-06-29 | 1999-02-24 | Method for detecting basic information about moving body and multiple sensor for basic information about moving body |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2000000832A1 true WO2000000832A1 (en) | 2000-01-06 |
Family
ID=27292350
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP1999/003282 Ceased WO2000000832A1 (en) | 1998-06-29 | 1999-06-21 | Mobile base information detecting method and mobile base information multi-sensor and acceleration sensor |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2000000832A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US9970956B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-05-15 | Hitachi Automotive Systems, Ltd. | Inertial sensor |
Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPH04252961A (en) * | 1991-01-29 | 1992-09-08 | Canon Inc | Angular acceleration sensor |
| JPH1048247A (en) * | 1996-04-30 | 1998-02-20 | Motorola Inc | Acceleration detecting element |
| JPH1096744A (en) * | 1996-09-20 | 1998-04-14 | Zexel Corp | Manufacture of capacitance type acceleration sensor |
-
1999
- 1999-06-21 WO PCT/JP1999/003282 patent/WO2000000832A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPH04252961A (en) * | 1991-01-29 | 1992-09-08 | Canon Inc | Angular acceleration sensor |
| JPH1048247A (en) * | 1996-04-30 | 1998-02-20 | Motorola Inc | Acceleration detecting element |
| JPH1096744A (en) * | 1996-09-20 | 1998-04-14 | Zexel Corp | Manufacture of capacitance type acceleration sensor |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US9970956B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-05-15 | Hitachi Automotive Systems, Ltd. | Inertial sensor |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11808574B2 (en) | Micromechanical detection structure of a MEMS multi-axis gyroscope, with reduced drifts of corresponding electrical parameters | |
| US8739626B2 (en) | Micromachined inertial sensor devices | |
| JP3811444B2 (en) | MEMS gyroscope with vertical vibrating mass | |
| US9599472B2 (en) | MEMS proof mass with split Z-axis portions | |
| EP2462408B1 (en) | Micromachined inertial sensor devices | |
| JP5714648B2 (en) | Mechanical quantity MEMS sensor and mechanical quantity MEMS sensor system | |
| EP2246706B1 (en) | Physical quantity sensor | |
| WO2013116356A1 (en) | Mems multi-axis accelerometer electrode structure | |
| JP2006215016A (en) | Sensor having both functions of gyroscope and accelerometer | |
| JP2007519902A (en) | A flush proof mass that can be used to detect acceleration along three axes | |
| JP7078067B2 (en) | Capacitive micromechanical accelerometer | |
| CN102124352B (en) | Acceleration sensor and structure | |
| JP2024015689A (en) | Physical quantity sensors and inertial measurement devices | |
| JP2000019198A (en) | Acceleration sensor | |
| US10775171B2 (en) | MEMS gyroscope with improved rejection of a quadrature error | |
| JP6870761B2 (en) | Robust Z-axis accelerometer | |
| JP2009222475A (en) | Compound sensor | |
| WO2000000832A1 (en) | Mobile base information detecting method and mobile base information multi-sensor and acceleration sensor | |
| JP4965546B2 (en) | Acceleration sensor | |
| JP2000081448A (en) | Method for detecting basic information about moving body and multiple sensor for basic information about moving body | |
| JP2010164569A (en) | Multiaxial acceleration sensor | |
| JP4858215B2 (en) | Compound sensor | |
| JP2023066598A (en) | Physical quantity sensor and inertial measurement device | |
| JP4525452B2 (en) | Multi-axis acceleration sensor | |
| JPH11248741A (en) | Capacitive multiaxial accelerometer |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| AK | Designated states |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): DE US |
|
| DFPE | Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101) | ||
| REG | Reference to national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: 8642 |